BBU3900 Hardware Description

BBU3900
Hardware Description
Issue Date 08 2011-09-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BBU3900 Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the BBU3900 hardware, such as boards, module, ports, cables, and connectors, and the functions of the hardware.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name DBS3900 WCDMA iDBS3900 WCDMA DBS3900 GSM DBS3900 DBS3900 LTE Version V200R013C00 V200R013C00 V100R013C00 V100R004C00 V100R003C00
Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are: l l l Install engineers Field engineers System engineers
Organization
1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description. 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
About This Document
The DBS3900 consists of the BBU3900 and different types of RRUs. The RRUs can be installed remotely so that the DBS3900 can be used in various scenarios outdoors. 3 DBS3900 Power System The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to -48 V DC power for the base station. 4 DBS3900 Monitoring System The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900. 5 BBU3900 Equipment This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels, module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications. 6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900 The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900. 7 BBU3900 Cables This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, and installation positions. 8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900 This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA and SLPU.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
About This Document
Symbol
Description Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
iv
About This Document
Convention Boldface >
Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description...........................................................................1 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets........................................................................................................6
2.1 Exteriors and Functions of DBS3900 Cabinets..................................................................................................7 2.2 Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900.........................................................................................9 2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)...................................................................................29 2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).......................................................................33 2.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.............................................................................................41
3 DBS3900 Power System..............................................................................................................47

3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the APM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A) ................................................................................................................................................................................48 3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)....................................................................................................................................................................49 3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06........................................54 3.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)....................................................................58 3.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)....................................................63 3.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.......................................................................70
4 DBS3900 Monitoring System....................................................................................................73

4.1 BBU Monitoring Port.......................................................................................................................................74 4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)..............................................................................75 4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)................................................................76 4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06...................................................................................80 4.5 Customized Alarm Input..................................................................................................................................82
5 BBU3900 Equipment...................................................................................................................86
5.1 Exterior of the BBU3900..................................................................................................................................87 5.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900...............................................................................................................88 5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900...........................................................................................................88 5.2.2 WMPT...................................................................................................................................................100 5.2.3 GTMU...................................................................................................................................................104 5.2.4 LMPT.....................................................................................................................................................110 5.2.5 WBBP....................................................................................................................................................113 5.2.6 LBBP.....................................................................................................................................................116 Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi
Contents
5.2.7 FAN.......................................................................................................................................................120 5.2.8 UPEU.....................................................................................................................................................121 5.2.9 UEIU......................................................................................................................................................125 5.2.10 UTRP...................................................................................................................................................126 5.2.11 USCU...................................................................................................................................................132 5.2.12 UBRI....................................................................................................................................................134
6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900........................................................................................137

6.1 Power Cable Connections...............................................................................................................................138 6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)..........................................................138 6.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)..........................................142 6.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06.................................................................156 6.2 Transmission Cable Connections...................................................................................................................158 6.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base Station..........................................158 6.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base Station.............................................160 6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station........................................162 6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station..........................................165 6.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station............................................167 6.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station..............................................169 6.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................170 6.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................176 6.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode...............................................................................................................................................................181 6.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode...............................................................................................................................................................183 6.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................184 6.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................188 6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode...............................................................................................................................................................192 6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................196 6.2.15 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................199 6.2.16 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................205 6.2.17 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode...............................................................................................................................................................210 6.2.18 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................213 6.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station.....................................................216 6.3 CPRI Cable Connections................................................................................................................................218 6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station....................................................................218 Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
6.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station.......................................................................219 6.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station.................................................................220 6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station...................................................................................222 6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station..................................................................................223 6.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station...............................................................................225 6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Station..................................................................226 6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections...........................................................................................................227 6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)........................................227 6.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C).......................234 6.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/IFS06.....................................................242
7 BBU3900 Cables.........................................................................................................................245
7.1 List of BBU3900 Cables.................................................................................................................................247 7.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................249 7.3 BBU Power Cable..........................................................................................................................................250 7.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB)..............................................................................................................................251 7.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C).............................................................................................................................252 7.6 E1/T1 Cable....................................................................................................................................................253 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable..........................................................................................................256 7.8 FE/GE Cable...................................................................................................................................................257 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable...............................................................................................................258 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports......................................................................................................259 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports..........................................................................................................259 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable....................................................................................................................................260 7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable................................................................................................................................261 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU.........................................................................264 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU........................................................................265 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU.......................................................................266 7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable..................................................................................................................267 7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...........................................................................................268 7.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...........................................................................................268 7.20 BBU Alarm Cable........................................................................................................................................269 7.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................271
8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900.........................................................................................272

8.1 EMUA............................................................................................................................................................274 8.2 OMB...............................................................................................................................................................274 8.3 IMB03.............................................................................................................................................................278 8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack........................................................................................................................281 8.5 DCDU-03........................................................................................................................................................282 8.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C..........................................................................................................................285 8.7 AC/DC Power Equipment..............................................................................................................................290 8.8 SLPU..............................................................................................................................................................294 8.8.1 Exterior of SLPU...................................................................................................................................294 Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii
Contents
8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPU....................................................................................................................295 8.8.3 UELP.....................................................................................................................................................296 8.8.4 UFLP.....................................................................................................................................................297 8.8.5 USLP2...................................................................................................................................................298 8.9 WGRU............................................................................................................................................................300
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
ix
1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description
Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description.
08 (2011-09-30)
This is the eighth commercial issue. Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), no information is added. Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), the following part is modified: Part 5.2.3 GTMU 5.2.10 UTRP Modification The E1 bypass function is deleted. The description of DIP switches is changed.
Compared with issue 07 (2011-08-30), no information is deleted.
07 (2011-08-30)
This is the seventh commercial issue. Compared with issue 06 (2011-07-30), no information is added. Compared with issue 06 (2011-07-30), the following part is modified: Part 5.2.5 WBBP Modification Added the baseband transfer capacity of the WBBP.
06 (2011-07-30)
This is the sixth commercial issue.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1
Compared with issue 05 (2011-06-25), no information is added. Compared with issue 05 (2011-06-25), the following part is modified: Part 2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) 2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Modification Added the requirements of customer equipment specifications.
05 (2011-06-25)
This is the fifth commercial issue. Compared with issue 04 (2011-05-25), no information is added. Compared with issue 04 (2011-05-25), the following part is modified: Part 5.2.8 UPEU Modification Added the description of the power of the UPEU.
04 (2011-05-25)
This is the fourth commercial issue. Compared with issue 03 (2011-04-30), no information is added. Compared with issue 03 (2011-04-30), the following part is modified: Part 3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06 3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) Modification The recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables are modified.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
03 (2011-04-30)
This is the third commercial issue. Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), this issue is added with the following topic: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) 2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) 2.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06 3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the APM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A) 3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) 3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06 3.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) 3.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) 3.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06 4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) 4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) 4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06 6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) 6.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) 6.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06 6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) 6.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) 6.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/IFS06
Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), no information is changed. Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-10), no information is deleted.
02 (2011-04-10)
This is the second commercial issue. Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), no information is added. Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), the following part is modified: Part 5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900 Modification The maximum quantity of the WBBP is modified.

01 (2011-03-30)
This is the first commercial issue. Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is added. Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is changed. Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-10), no information is deleted.
Draft B (2011-03-10)
This is the Draft version. Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), no information is added. Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), the following part is modified: Part 6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station Modification Some descriptions are optimized.
Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-30), no information is deleted.
Draft A (2011-01-30)
This is the Draft version. Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTS V100R012C00, this issue is added with the following topic: l l l l l 3 DBS3900 Power System Cabinets for the DBS3900 6.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station 6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Station 8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack
Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTS V100R012C00, the following part is modified: Part 5.2.7 FAN 5.2.8 UPEU 6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Station 5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900 6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)
Modification The description of the FANc is added. The description of the UPEUc is added. The description of triple mode scenario is added.
Part 2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)
Modification
Compared with issue MBTS V100R003C00, WCDMA-NodeB V200R012C00, and GSM-BTS V100R012C00, no information is deleted.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
2
About This Chapter
Matched DBS3900 Cabinets
The DBS3900 consists of the BBU3900 and different types of RRUs. The RRUs can be installed remotely so that the DBS3900 can be used in various scenarios outdoors.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
2.1 Exteriors and Functions of DBS3900 Cabinets

As required in outdoor scenarios, Huawei offers multiple cabinets with different functions for the DBS3900. The cabinets are the APM series cabinets such as the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.C), TMC series cabinets such as the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), TMC11H (Ver.B), and TMC11H(Ver.C), and storage battery cabinets such as the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T.
Exterior
Figure 2-1 shows the exterior of the DBS3900 cabinet. Figure 2-1 Exterior of the DBS3900 cabinet
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Function
NOTE
For details about the functions of the matched cabinets, see the APM30 User Guide, APM30H User Guide, APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D/T User Guide, and APM30H(Ver.C) Product Description.
The main functions of the DBS3900 cabinet are as follows: l The advanced power module (APM) series cabinets are the power cabinets, which are used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC and DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations used outdoors and also provide space for customer equipment. The differences between the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A) are heat dissipation and monitoring modes. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler. The APM30 uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the APM30H (Ver.A) uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans for heat dissipation. The APM30 is configured with the APM power monitoring interface unit (APMI) and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) for environment and power monitoring, and the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the heat exchange unit type A (HEUA) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting. The differences between the APM30H (Ver.A) and the APM30H (Ver.B) are monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the HEUA for fan monitoring and alarm reporting, and the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) for centralized monitoring. The APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the power distribution unit (PDU) for power distribution, and the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the embedded power supply system (EPS) for power distribution. In addition, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the electronic labeling unit (ELU) for automatic reporting of cabinet type. The differences between the APM30H (Ver.C) and APM30H (Ver.B) are monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver.C) is configured with the central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) for fan monitoring and alarm reporting, and the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the CMUA for centralized monitoring. The APM30H (Ver.C) is configured with the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) for power distribution, and the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the EPS for power distribution. The transmission cabinet (TMC) series cabinets are the transmission cabinets used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The TMC series cabinets provide DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations and also provide space for customer equipment. The differences between the TMC and the TMC11H (Ver.A) are heat dissipation and monitoring modes. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.A) and the TMC11H (Ver.B) are monitoring modes. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heatexchanger cooler. The TMC uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the TMC11H (Ver.A) uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans for heat dissipation. The TMC is configured with the APMI and AFMU for monitoring, the TMC11H (Ver.A) is configured with the HEUA for monitoring, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured with the CMUA and HPMI for monitoring. In addition, the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured with the ELU for automatic reporting of cabinet type. The differences between the TMC11H (Ver.C) and the TMC11H (Ver.B) are monitoring and power distribution modes. The TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured with the CMUE for fan monitoring and alarm reporting, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured with the CMUA for centralized monitoring. The TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured with the DCDU-11B for
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
power distribution, and the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured with the DCDU-03B for power distribution. DCDU is short for direct current distribution unit. l Storage battery cabinets are used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The cabinets provide space for storage batteries, which provide long-duration backup power for the distributed base station and separate base station. The differences between the integrated battery backup system with direct cooler (IBBS200D) and the integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T) are the configurations of the modules in the cabinets. For details, see Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900. TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
For exteriors and functions of the outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box-03 (IMB03), and indoor floor installation support-06 (IFS06), see 8.2 OMB, 8.3 IMB03, and IFS06 respectively.
2.2 Structure of the Matched Cabinets for the DBS3900

This section describes the module or board configurations of the matched cabinets for the DBS3900.
APM
The APM series cabinets are classified into the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), APM30H (Ver.B), and APM30H (Ver.C) based on different versions. Figure 2-2 shows the module configurations in the APM series cabinets. Figure 2-2 Module configurations in the APM series cabinets
The APM series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation, power distribution, and monitoring modes. The differences are achieved through the internal components of the cabinets, as listed in Table 2-1.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Table 2-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets Cabinet Type SN Module/ Board Optional/ Mandatory Maximum Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1 Descriptio n
APM30
Fan box
Mandatory
The fan box configured with a fan, APM power monitoring interface unit (APMI), and APM fan monitoring interface unit (AFMU) is installed on the top of the cabinet. The power distribution unit (PDU) distributes AC power and DC power. The baseband unit (BBU) is installed in the 2 U space under the PDU, processing baseband signals. The power supply unit (PSU) converts 220 V AC power into 48 V DC power. It is configured only in the AC cabinet.
PDU
Mandatory
BBU
Mandatory
PSU (AC/ DC)
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
10
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Maximum Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1
Descriptio n
PMU
Mandatory
The power monitoring unit (PMU) is configured only in the AC cabinet. The fan box configured with a fan, heat exchange unit type A (HEUA), and HERT power monitoring interface unit (HPMI) is installed on the top of the cabinet. HERT is short for Huawei Enhanced Radio Technology. The PDU distributes AC power and DC power. The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the PDU, processing baseband signals.
APM30H (Ver.A)
Fan box
Mandatory
PDU
Mandatory
BBU
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
11
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
PSU (AC/ DC)
Mandatory
The PSU converts 220 V AC power into 48 V DC power. It is configured only in the AC cabinet. The PMU is configured only in the AC cabinet. The fan box configured with a fan, HPMI, and central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) is installed on the top of the cabinet.
PMU
Mandatory
APM30H (Ver.B)
Fan box
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
12
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
SLPU
Mandatory
To protect trunk signals, a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) configured with the universal E1/ T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space on the top of the cabinet. To protect monitoring signals, an SLPU configured with two USLP2s is optional. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space under the BBU.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
13
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
EPS
Mandatory
The embedded power supply system (EPS) distributes AC power and DC power. It is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B). The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the EPS, processing baseband signals. The PSU converts 220 V AC power into 48 V DC power. It is configured only in the AC cabinet. The PMU is configured only in the AC cabinet.
BBU
Mandatory
PSU (AC/ DC)
Mandatory
PMU
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
14
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
APM30H (Ver.C)
Fan box
Mandatory
The fan box configured with a fan, HPMI, and central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) is installed on the top of the cabinet. To protect trunk signals, an SLPU configured with the UELP or UFLP is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space on the top of the cabinet. To protect monitoring signals, an SLPU configured with two USLP2s is optional. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space under the BBU.
SLPU
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
15
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
EPU
Mandatory
The embedded power subrack unit (EPU) distributes AC power and DC power. It is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.C). The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the EPU, processing baseband signals. The PSU converts 220 V AC power into 48 V DC power. It is configured only in the AC cabinet. The PMU is configured only in the AC cabinet.
BBU
Mandatory
PSU (AC/ DC)
Mandatory
PMU
Mandatory
TMC
The transmission cabinet (TMC) series cabinets are classified into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), and TMC11H (Ver.B) based on different versions. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. The TMC series cabinets can also be classified into the following two types based on different application scenarios: l TMC providing space for the transmission equipment, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
16
Figure 2-3 TMC series cabinets (1)
TMC configured with the BBU in the 48 V DC power supply scenario, as shown in Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4 TMC series cabinets (2)
The TMC series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation and monitoring modes. The differences are achieved through the internal components of the cabinets, as listed in Table 2-2. Table 2-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets Cabinet Type SN Module/ Board Optional/ Mandatory Maximum Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1 Descriptio n
TMC
Fan box
Mandatory
The fan box configured with a fan, APMI, and AFMU is installed on the top of the cabinet.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
17
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The TMC is configure d with a direct current distributi on unit-03C (DCDU03C) when the TMC provides only space for the transmiss ion equipme nt. l The TMC with a built-in BBU is configure d with a DCDU-0 3B in the 48 V DC power supply scenario.
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-03B, processing baseband signals.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
18
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
TMC11H (Ver.A)
Fan box
Mandatory
The fan box configured with a fan, HEUA, and HPMI is installed on the top of the cabinet. l The TMC11H (Ver.A) is configure d with a DCDU-0 3C when the TMC provides space only for the transmiss ion equipme nt. l The TMC11H (Ver.A) with a built-in BBU is configure d with a DCDU-0 3B in the 48 V DC power supply scenario.
DCDU-03
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
19
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
BBU
Mandatory
The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-03B, processing baseband signals. The fan box configured with a fan, HPMI, and CMUA is installed on the top of the cabinet. To protect trunk signals, an SLPU configured with the UELP or UFLP is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space on the top of the cabinet. To protect monitoring signals, an SLPU configured with two USLP2s can be configured. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space under the BBU.
TMC11H (Ver.B)
Fan box
Mandatory
SLPU
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
20
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
DCDU-03
Mandatory
l The TMC11H (Ver.B) is configure d with a DCDU-0 3C when the TMC provides space only for the transmiss ion equipme nt. l The TMC11H (Ver.B) with a built-in BBU is configure d with a DCDU-0 3B in the 48 V DC power supply scenario.
BBU
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
21
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
TMC11H (Ver.C)
Fan box
Mandatory
The fan box configured with a fan, HPMI, and CMUE is installed on the top of the cabinet. To protect trunk signals, an SLPU configured with the UELP or UFLP is mandatory. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space on the top of the cabinet. To protect monitoring signals, an SLPU configured with two USLP2s can be configured. The SLPU is installed in the 1 U space under the BBU.
SLPU
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
22
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
DCDU-11
Mandatory
l The TMC11H (Ver.C) is configure d with a DCDU-1 1C when the TMC provides space only for the transmiss ion equipme nt. l The TMC11H (Ver.C) with a built-in BBU is configure d with a DCDU-1 1B in the 48 V DC power supply scenario.
BBU
Mandatory
BBC/IBBS
The battery cabinets are classified into the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver.A), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), and IBBS200D based on different versions. BBC is short for battery backup cabinet. Figure 2-5 shows the module configurations in the battery cabinets.
Figure 2-5 Module configurations in the battery cabinets
The IBBS200D is different from the IBBS200T in heat dissipation mode. The differences are achieved through the monitoring modules installed in different positions in the cabinets, as listed in Table 2-3. Table 2-3 Functions of the components in the battery cabinets Cabinet Type SN Module/ Board Optional/ Mandatory Maximum Number Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1 Descriptio n
BBC
Power supply box for the heating film Ground bar of the cabinet
Mandatory
The power supply box feeds power to the heating film. The ground bar is used for the grounding of the components in the cabinet. The storage battery provides longduration backup power for a base station. The BBC provides power to storage batteries.
Mandatory
Storage battery
Mandatory
BBC
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
24
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
IBBS200T (Ver.A)
TEC
Mandatory
The thermoelectr ic cooling unit (TEC) is installed in the protecting hood for the TEC on the front door of the cabinet. The TEC consists of the TEC module, inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, heatdissipation piece, and monitoring board. The transfer terminal block is installed on the inner side of the front door of the cabinet. It consists of four interconnecti on terminals. The transfer terminal is installed on the inner side of the front door of the cabinet.
Transfer terminal for signal cables
Mandatory
Transfer terminal for the input power cable for the TEC
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
25
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
Heat insulation foam
Mandatory
The heat insulation foam is installed on the left in the cabinet. The storage battery provides longduration backup power for a base station. The junction box is installed on the right in the IBBS200T. It consists of the copper bar, circuit breaker for the batteries, and circuit breaker for the TEC. The fan is installed on the front door of the cabinet, dissipating heat in the cabinet.
Storage battery
Mandatory
Junction box for the power cable
Mandatory
IBBS200D
Fan
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
26
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
CMUA
Mandatory
The CMUA provides functions of temperature control, Boolean alarm detection, and ELU identificatio n of the cabinet. The storage battery provides longduration backup power for a base station. The power distribution box is installed on the upper right side of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or FAN unit and to storage batteries.
Storage battery
Mandatory
Power distribution box
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
27
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
IBBS200T (Ver.B)/ (Ver.C)
TEC
Mandatory
The TEC is installed in the protecting hood for the TEC on the front door of the cabinet. The TEC consists of the TEC module, inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, heatdissipation piece, and monitoring board. The CMUA provides functions of temperature control, Boolean alarm detection, and ELU identificatio n of the cabinet.
CMUA
Mandatory
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
28
Cabinet Type
SN
Module/ Board
Optional/ Mandatory
Descriptio n
Power distribution box
Mandatory
The power distribution box is installed on the upper right side of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or FAN unit and to storage batteries. The storage battery provides longduration backup power for a base station.
Storage battery
Mandatory
OMB/IMB03/IFS06
For the structures of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06, see 8.2 OMB, 8.3 IMB03, and IFS06 respectively.
2.3 Usage Scenarios of the APM30 and APM30H (Ver.A)

In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets can be used for a DBS3900 to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity.
Cabinet Configuration Principles

NOTE
In this section, the APM is APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A), and the TMC is TMC or TMC11H(Ver.A).
l l
A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. If there are more than 12 RRUs, they must be configured in different base stations. A single APM or TMC can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
29
l l l l l l
A single APM supports only one TMC and a maximum of one integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit. A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-wire fiber optic cables can be led out from a single APM. A single DCDU supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs. The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the battery cabinet. A backup battery cabinet (BBC) or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked under a TMC. If an extension cabinet such as a battery cabinet or transmission cabinet is required during an initial site deployment, the extension cabinet is placed on the left, and the basic cabinet is placed on the right. If both an extension battery cabinet and an extension transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is placed on the left of the basic cabinet and the transmission cabinet is placed onto the battery cabinet or on the left of the battery cabinet. Clearance must be reserved during an initial site deployment for future capacity expansion. In a capacity expansion scenario, the original cabinets are not relocated and new cabinets are added only to the right of the original cabinets unless they are required to be installed to the left of the original cabinets in exactly the reverse order of the original cabinets.
Requirements of Customer Equipment Specifications

Customer equipment to be installed in a Huawei cabinet must satisfy the following requirements: l Dimension requirements (as shown in Figure 2-6): The customer equipment must be 19-inch wide, which is the width of the standard equipment. The maximum depth of the customer equipment is 310 mm if the equipment supports natural ventilation or has air vents on the right and left; the maximum depth of the customer equipment is 280 mm if the equipment has air vents in the front and back. A maximum cabling pace in front of the panel is 70 mm. l Requirement for air vents: If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to back. If the customer equipment support natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation. l Requirement for temperature In areas where the highest temperature is or is below 40C, the customer must be able to function properly at 10C temperature or even lower temperature and at 55C or even higher temperature. In areas where the highest temperature is above 40C, the customer must be able to function properly at 10C temperature or even lower temperature and at 60C or even higher temperature.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
30
Figure 2-6 Requirements of customer equipment dimension and ventilation
(1) Customer equipment with natural ventilation
(2) Customer equipment with air vents on the right and left
(3) Customer equipment with air vents on the front and back
Cabinet Configurations in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base Station

NOTE
The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario only.
A single-mode or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM. When 6 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APMs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM, which is on the left. The configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements for power backup, reserved space, and RRU configuration. Table 2-4 lists the configurations. Table 2-4 Cabinet configurations in a single-mode or dual-mode base station Input Power Backup Power Requirement No backup power requirement Reserved Space 5U 16 U 12 U 23 U RRU Cabinet Configuration One APM One APM and one TMC Two APMs Two APMs and one TMC
31
110 V AC or 220 V AC
6 RRUs 6 RRUs 12 RRUs 12 RRUs
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Input Power
Backup Power Requirement 0.5- or 2-hour backup power
Reserved Space 5U 16 U
RRU
Cabinet Configuration One APM and one IBBS One APM, one TMC, and one IBBS Two APMs and two IBBSs Two APMs, two IBBSs, and one TMC One TMC with one built-in DCDU One TMC with two built-in DCDUs
6 RRUs 6 RRUs
12 U 23 U
12 RRUs 12 RRUs
48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
8U
12 RRUs
In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if no power backup is required, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and RRU configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the configurations. Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if no power backup is required
If the 0.5- or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and RRU configuration. Figure 2-8 shows the configurations.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
32
Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 0.5- or 2hour backup power is required
In a 48 V DC power supply scenario, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and RRU configuration. Figure 2-9 shows the configurations. Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a 48 V DC power supply scenario
2.4 Usage Scenario of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)

In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets can be used for the DBS3900 to meet various requirements for power backup, transmission, and capacity.
Cabinet Configuration Principles

l l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 remote radio units (RRUs). If there are more than 12 RRUs, they must be configured in more than one DBS3900. A single advanced power module (APM) or transmission cabinet (TMC) can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
A single APM can be configured with only one TMC and a maximum of two integrated battery backup systems with direct cooler (IBBS200Ds) or integrated battery backup systems with TEC (IBBS200Ts). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit. A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-wire fiber optic cables can be led out from a single APM. A single direct current distribution unit (DCDU) supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs. The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the storage battery cabinet. A backup battery cabinet (BBC) or IBBS200T can be stacked with a cabinet of the same type or be stacked under a TMC. If an auxiliary cabinet such as a storage battery cabinet or transmission cabinet is required during an initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is placed on the left, and the basic cabinet is placed on the right. If both the storage battery cabinet and the transmission cabinet are required, the storage battery cabinet is placed on the left of the basic cabinet and the transmission cabinet is placed onto the storage battery cabinet or on the left of the storage battery cabinet. Clearance must be reserved during an initial site deployment for future capacity expansion. In the capacity expansion scenario, the original cabinets are not relocated and new cabinets are added only to the right of the original cabinets unless they are required to be installed to the left of the original cabinets in exactly the reverse order of the original cabinets.
l l l l l
Requirements of Customer Equipment Specifications

Customer equipment to be installed in a Huawei cabinet must satisfy the following requirements: l Dimension requirements (as shown in Figure 2-10): The customer equipment must be 19-inch wide, which is the width of the standard equipment. The maximum depth of the customer equipment is 280 mm if the equipment supports natural ventilation or has air vents on the right and left; the maximum depth of the customer equipment is 250 mm if the equipment has air vents in the front and back. A maximum cabling pace in front of the panel is 100 mm. l Requirement for air vents: If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must have air vents on the right and left or on the front and back so that wind blows from left to right or from front to back. If the customer equipment support natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U slot must be reserved above and below the slot respectively for dissipation. l Requirement for temperature In areas where the highest temperature is or is below 40C, the customer must be able to function properly at 10C temperature or even lower temperature and at 55C or even higher temperature. In areas where the highest temperature is above 40C, the customer must be able to function properly at 10C temperature or even lower temperature and at 60C or even higher temperature.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
34
Figure 2-10 Requirements of customer equipment dimension and ventilation
(1) Customer equipment with natural ventilation
(2) Customer equipment with air vents on the right and left
(3) Customer equipment with air vents on the front and back
Cabinet Configurations in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Scenario

Only one baseband unit (BBU) is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario and the BBU is installed in the APM. If 7 to 12 RRUs are configured in a DBS3900, two APMs are required and the BBU is configured in the left APM cabinet, which is the basic APM. The configuration of a DBS3900 in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario varies depending on the requirements of power backup, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration. Table 2-5 lists the configurations. Table 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station Power Supply Power Backup No power backup Reserved Clearance 5U 16 U 12 U 23 U 0.5-hour or 2hour backup power
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Carrier Frequency Configuration 6 RRUs 6 RRUs 12 RRUs 12 RRUs 6 RRUs
Cabinet Configuration One APM One APM and one TMC Two APMs Two APMs and one TMC One APM and one IBBS
5U
35
Power Supply
Power Backup
Reserved Clearance 16 U
Carrier Frequency Configuration 6 RRUs
Cabinet Configuration One APM, one TMC, and one IBBS Two APMs and two IBBSs Two APMs, two IBBSs, and one TMC One APM and two IBBSs One APM, two IBBSs, and one TMC Two APMs and four IBBSs Two APMs, four IBBSs, and one TMC One TMC with one built-in DCDU One TMC with two built-in DCDUs One +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
12 U 23 U
12 RRUs 12 RRUs
4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power
5U 16 U
6 RRUs 6 RRUs
12 U 23 U
12 RRUs 12 RRUs
48 V DC
9U
6 RRUs
8U
12 RRUs
+24 V DC
5U
6 RRUs
In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if there is no backup power requirement, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved clearance and carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-11 shows the configurations.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
36
Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if no backup power is required
If the 0.5-hour backup power or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved clearance and carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-12 shows the configurations. Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 0.5-hour or 2-hour backup power is required
If the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a singlemode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved clearance and carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-13 shows the configurations.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
37
Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station if the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required
In a 48 V DC power supply scenario, the cabinet configuration of a single-mode or dual-mode base station varies depending on the requirements of reserved space and carrier frequency configuration. Figure 2-14 shows the configurations. Figure 2-14 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a 48 V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-15 shows the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a +24 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a +24 V DC power supply scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
38
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode DBS3900

Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station. The basic BBU is BBU0, which is installed in the basic APM or TMC on the left. The extension BBU is BBU1, which is installed in the extension APM or TMC on the right. The configuration of a triple-mode DBS3900 varies depending on the requirements of power backup, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration. Table 2-6 lists the configurations. Table 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode DBS3900 Power Supply Power Backup No power backup Reserved Clearance 10 U 21 U 10 U 21 U Carrier Frequency Configuration 12 RRUs 12 RRUs 12 RRUs 12 RRUs Cabinet Configuration Two APMs Two APMs and one TMC Two APMs and two IBBSs Two APMs, two IBBSs, and one TMC Two APMs and four IBBSs Two APMs, four IBBSs, and one TMC Two TMC Two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B)
0.5-hour or 2hour backup power
4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power
10 U 21 U
12 RRUs 12 RRUs
48 V DC +24 V DC
18 U 10 U
12 RRUs 12 RRUs
In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if no backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station varies depending on the requirement of reserved clearance. Figure 2-16 shows the configurations. Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a triple mode DBS3900 if no backup power is required
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
39
If 0.5-hour or 2-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station varies depending on the requirement of reserved clearance. Figure 2-17 shows the configurations. Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if the 0.5-hour or 2-hour backup power is required
If the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required, the cabinet configuration of a triplemode base station varies depending on the requirement of reserved clearance. Figure 2-18 shows the configurations. Figure 2-18 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station if the 4-hour, 6-hour, or 8-hour backup power is required
Figure 2-19 shows the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a 48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 2-19 Cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a 48 V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-20 shows the cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a +24 V DC power supply scenario.
Figure 2-20 Cabinet configuration of a triple-mode base station in a +24 V DC power supply scenario
2.5 Usage Scenario of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06

In outdoor scenarios, multiple cabinets and different configurations of cabinets are used for the DBS3900 to meet various requirements for usage environment, power input, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration.
Cabinet Configurations of a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base Station

If a DBS3900 is configured with an outdoor mini box (OMB) or with an indoor mini box (IMB03) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, only one baseband unit (BBU) can be configured and is configured in the OMB or the IMB03 and remote radio units (RRUs) can be installed on a pole, a wall, a U-steel, or an angle steel. If a DBS3900 is configured with both the IMB03 and the indoor floor installation support (IFS06), the IMB03 and the IFS06 can be installed together, a scenario where the DBS3900 is installed on an indoor centralized rack (ICR). The configuration of a DBS3900 in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario varies depending on the requirements of usage environment, power input, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration. Table 2-7 lists the configurations. Table 2-7 Cabinet configurations in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario Power Supply Reserved Clearance 3U 6U 12 U 3U 48 V DC 3U 3U Carrier Frequency Configuration One RRU Six RRUs 12 RRUs One RRU Three RRUs Six RRUs Cabinet Configuration One OMB Two IMB03s and one IFS06 Four IMB03s and two IFS06s One IMB03 One OMB One IMB03 and one IFS06 Outdoors Indoors Application Environment Outdoors Indoors
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
41
Power Supply
Reserved Clearance 6U 3U
Carrier Frequency Configuration 12 RRUs Six RRUs Six RRUs 12 RRUs
Cabinet Configuration Two IMB03s and two IFS06s One IMB03 Two IMB03s and one IFS06 Four IMB03s and two IFS06s
Application Environment
+24 V DC
6U 12 U
Indoors
Figure 2-21 shows the configuration of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 2-21 Configuration of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Figure 2-22 shows the configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual mode base station. Figure 2-22 Configuration of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Figure 2-23 shows the configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station.
Figure 2-23 Configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station
Figure 2-24 shows the configuration of an OMB in a 48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 2-24 Cabinet configurations of an OMB in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the 48 V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-25 shows the configuration of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station Figure 2-25 Cabinet configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the 48 V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-26 shows the configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station.
Figure 2-26 Configuration of an IMB03 in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the 48 V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-27 shows the configurations of an ICR in a single-mode or dual-mode base station in a +24 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 2-27 Configurations of an ICR in a single-mode and dual-mode base station in the +24 V DC power supply scenario
Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station

If a DBS3900 is configured with an ICR, the DBS3900 can be configured as a triple-mode base station. In this case, two BBUs are required. The basic BBU is BBU0 and is placed on the left or on the upper ICR. The extension BBU is BBU1 and is placed on the right or on the lower ICR.
NOTE
If a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or an IMB03, the DBS3900 can only be configured as a singlemode or dual-mode base station.
The configuration of a DBS3900 in a triple-mode scenario varies depending on the requirements of usage environment, power input, reserved clearance, and carrier frequency configuration. Table 2-8 lists the configurations.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
44
Table 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station Power Supply Reserved Clearance 12 U 6U 6U +24 V DC 12 U Carrier Frequency Configuration 12 RRUs Six RRUs 12 RRUs 12 RRUs Cabinet Configuration Four IMB03s and two IFS06s Two IMB03s and one IFS06 Two IMB03s and two IFS06s Four IMB03s and two IFS06s Application Environment Indoors
110 V AC or 220 V AC 48 V DC
Figure 2-28 shows the configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 2-28 Configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 2-29 shows the configuration of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the 48 V DC power supply scenario.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
45
Figure 2-29 Configuration of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the 48 V DC power supply scenario
Figure 2-30 shows the configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 2-30 Configurations of an ICR in a triple-mode base station in the +24 V DC power supply scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
46
3 DBS3900 Power System
3
About This Chapter
DBS3900 Power System
The DBS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supplies. When AC power supply or +24 V DC power supply is used, the power supply must be converted to -48 V DC power for the base station. Table 3-1, Table 3-2, and Table 3-3 list the input voltage ranges supported by the DBS3900. Table 3-1 Applicable AC input voltage ranges Power Input Type 220 V AC single-phase 220/380 V AC three-phase 110 V AC dual-live-wire Rated Voltage 200 V AC to 240 V AC 200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC 100/200 V AC to 120/240 V AC Working Voltage 176 V AC to 290 V AC 176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC 90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC
Table 3-2 -48 V DC input voltage range Power Input Type -48 V DC Rated Voltage -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
Table 3-3 +24 V DC input voltage range Power Input Type +24 V DC Rated Voltage +21.6 V DC to +29 V DC
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
47
3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the APM30 or AMP30H (Ver.A)
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables for the APM30 and the APM30H (Ver.A). The configurations are based on the maximum configuration of a DBS3900 and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet. The maximum configuration indicates that the DBS3900 is configured with a maximum combination of modules and a maximum combination of cabinets. APM is short for advanced power module. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler. Table 3-4 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables when the DBS3900 is configured with an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in an outdoor scenario with AC power supply. Table 3-4 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured Power Supply Requirement for the Circuit Breaker for Customer Equipment 1 x 32 A 3 x 20 A 2 x 32 A Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable Length of the Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase power 220 V AC threephase power 110 V AC dual-livewire power
4 mm2 or 6 mm2 2.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
40 m 40 m 40 m
Table 3-5 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables when the DBS3900 is configured with a transmission cabinet (TMC) or TMC11H (Ver.A) in an outdoor scenario with DC power supply. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
48
Table 3-5 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) is configured Power Supply Requirement for the Circuit Breaker for Customer Equipment Minimum of 1 x 32 A and maximum of 1 x 80 A (both using the one-level magnetic blast breaker) Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable Length of the Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase power
16 mm2
15 m
3.2 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the AMP30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables for the APM30H (Ver.B) and the APM30H (Ver.C). The configurations are based on the maximum configuration of a DBS3900 and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet. The maximum configuration indicates that the DBS3900 is configured with a maximum combination of modules and a maximum combination of cabinets. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler. In an outdoor scenario with AC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 3-6 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in this scenario. Table 3-6 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured Power Supply Requirement for the Circuit Breaker for Customer Equipment Minimum of 1 x 50 A and maximum of 1 x 63 A (both using the two-level magnetic blast breaker) Minimum of 1 x 25 A and maximum of 1 x 32 A (both using the three-level magnetic blast breaker) Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable Length of the Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase power 110 V AC dual-livewire power 220 V AC threephase power
6 mm2
40 m
2.5 mm2
40 m
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
49
In an outdoor scenario with AC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the APM30H (Ver.C). Table 3-7 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in this scenario. Table 3-7 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the APM30H (Ver.C) is configured Power Supply Requirement for the Circuit Breaker for Customer Equipment 1 x 63 A (using the two-level magnetic blast breaker) 1 x 70 A (using the two-level magnetic blast breaker) 1 x 25 A (using the three-level magnetic blast breaker) 4 mm2 40 m Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable Length of the Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase power 110 V AC dual-livewire power 220 V AC threephase power
16 mm2
40 m
In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the TMC11H (Ver.B). Table 3-8 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in this scenario. Table 3-8 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the TMC11H (Ver.B) is configured Power Supply Requirement for the Circuit Breaker for Customer Equipment Minimum of 1 x 32 A and maximum of 1 x 80 A (both using the one-level magnetic blast breaker) Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable Length of the Power Cable
48 V DC
25 mm2
15 m
In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 3-9 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in this scenario.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
50
Table 3-9 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the TMC11H (Ver.C) is configured Maximum Configuration(1)(2)
(3)
Minimum Requirement for the Circuit Breaker on Customer Equipment(4)(5) 1 x 80 A
Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable
Length of the Power Cable
l Four to Six RRUs (power<300 W) l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)

(6)
16 mm2 cables for one external DC power input
10 m
l One to Three RRUs (power<300 W) l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)

(6)
1 x 63 A
l Four to Six RRUs (400 W power<560 W) l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)
(6)
1 x 160 A 2 x 80 A
35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one external DC power input 16 mm2 cables for two external DC power inputs(7)
l One to Three RRUs (400 W power<560 W) l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)
(6)
1 x 80 A
l Four to Six RRUs (300 W power<400 W) l One BBU
1 x 100 A
35 mm2 (XLPE) cables for one external DC power input
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
51
Maximum Configuration(1)(2)
(3)
l Transmission equipment (power350 W)

(6)
16 mm2 cables for two external DC power inputs(7)
(6)
1 x 63 A
l Three RRUs (power<300 W) l Three RRUs (300 Wpower<400 W) l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)
(6)
1 x 100 A 2 x 63 A
(6)
1 x 160 A 2 x 63 A
l Three RRUs (300 Wpower<400 W) l Three RRUs (400 Wpower<560 W)
1 x 160 A
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
52
(3)
l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)

(6)
NOTE
(1) If both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs exist in the same base station, the power configuration for high-power RRUs will apply for the base station. (2) If possible, it is suggested to configure the base station with the power configuration for maximum high-power RRUs so as to satisfy all scenarios. If the power configuration has to be in accordance with actual scenarios, the circuit breaker and power cables need to be upgraded in case of base station extension. (3) If there are more than six RRUs in the base station, a new DCDU-11B will be needed. (4) The power configuration applicable for the scenarios with higher power consumption is also applicable for the scenarios with lower power consumption. (5) The circuit breakers with higher capacity is applicable for the scenarios where the circuit breakers with lower capacity can be used. The circuit breaker capacities are ranked as: 160 A > 2 x 80 A > 2 x 63 A > 100 A > 80 A > 63 A (6) If the power consumption of transmission equipment is over 350 W, the corresponding minimum requirement for the circuit breaker will be enhanced by the additional power consumption. (7) If two external power inputs are supplied, the following requirements must be met: l l l l The two power inputs must be supplied by the same power cabinet. The circuit breakers used for the two power inputs have the same model and specifications. The power cables for the two power inputs must have the same cross-sectional area and length. When powering on the DBS3900, turn on the two circuit breakers of power input before turning on the circuit breakers for all the RRUs. When powering off the DBS3900, turn off the circuit breakers for all the RRUs before turning off the two circuit breakers of power input.
In an outdoor scenario with DC power supply, a heater is required in the TMC series cabinets for the DBS3900. In this case, one additional AC power input is required. Table 3-10 lists the recommended configurations of circuit breakers and power cables.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
53
Table 3-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables for the heater Power Input Type Requirements for Circuit Breakers on Customer Equipment 2x5A Cross-Sectional Area of Power Input Cables 2.5 mm2 Length of Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase 110 V AC dual-livewire
15 m
In an outdoor scenario with +24 V DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with an APM30H (Ver.B) or an APM30H (Ver.C). Table 3-11 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables. Table 3-11 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) is configured Power Supply Requirement for the Circuit Breaker for Customer Equipment Minimum of 1 x 160 A and maximum of 2 x 100 A Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable Length of the Power Cable
+24 V DC
2 x 25 mm2
15 m
3.3 Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
This section lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables for the outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and indoor floor installation support (IFS06). The configurations are based on the maximum configuration of a DBS3900 and supply power to customer equipment in the cabinet. The maximum configuration indicates that the DBS3900 is configured with a maximum combination of modules and a maximum combination of cabinets. In an AC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or IMB03. Table 3-12 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in this scenario.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
54
Table 3-12 Configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables if the OMB or IMB03 is configured with a DBS3900 Power Supply Requirement for the Circuit Breaker for Customer Equipment Minimum of 1 x 5 A and maximum of 1 x 10 A Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable Length of the Power Cable
220 V AC singlephase power 110 V AC dual-livewire power
2.5 mm2
40 m
Table 3-13 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in an indoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with an DCDU-03B. Table 3-13 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in an indoor scenario with DC power supply and DCDU-03B Power Supply Requirement for the Circuit Breaker for Customer Equipment Minimum of 1 x 32 A and maximum of 1 x 80 A (both using the one-level magnetic blast breaker) Cross-Sectional Area of the Power Cable Length of the Power Cable
48 V DC
25 mm2
15 m
Table 3-14 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in an indoor scenario with DC power supply, the DBS3900 is configured with an DCDU-11B.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
55
Table 3-14 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables in an indoor scenario with DC power supply and DCDU-11B Maximum Configuration(1)(2)
(3)
l Four to Six RRUs (power<300 W) l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)

(6)
10 m
l One to Three RRUs (power<300 W) l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)

(6)
1 x 63 A
l Four to Six RRUs (400 W power<560 W) l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)
(6)
1 x 160 A 2 x 80 A
(6)
1 x 80 A
l Four to Six RRUs (300 W power<400 W) l One BBU
1 x 100 A
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
56
(3)
l Transmission equipment (power350 W)

(6)
(6)
1 x 63 A
(6)
1 x 100 A 2 x 63 A
(6)
1 x 100 A 2 x 63 A
l Three RRUs (300 Wpower<400 W) l Three RRUs (400 Wpower<560 W)
1 x 160 A
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
57
(3)
l One BBU l Transmission equipment (power350 W)

(6)
NOTE
(1) If both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs exist in the same base station, the power configuration for high-power RRUs will apply for the base station. (2) If possible, it is suggested to configure the base station with the power configuration for maximum high-power RRUs so as to satisfy all scenarios. If the power configuration has to be in accordance with actual scenarios, the circuit breaker and power cables need to be upgraded in case of base station extension. (3) If there are more than six RRUs in the base station, a new DCDU-11B will be needed. (4) The power configuration applicable for the scenarios with higher power consumption is also applicable for the scenarios with lower power consumption. (5) The circuit breakers with higher capacity is applicable for the scenarios where the circuit breakers with lower capacity can be used. The circuit breaker capacities are ranked as: 160 A > 2 x 80 A > 2 x 63 A > 100 A > 80 A > 63 A (6) If the power consumption of transmission equipment is over 350 W, the corresponding minimum requirement for the circuit breaker will be enhanced by the additional power consumption. (7) If two external power inputs are supplied, the following requirements must be met: l l l l The two power inputs must be supplied by the same power cabinet. The circuit breakers used for the two power inputs have the same model and specifications. The power cables for the two power inputs must have the same cross-sectional area and length. When powering on the DBS3900, turn on the two circuit breakers of power input before turning on the circuit breakers for all the RRUs. When powering off the DBS3900, turn off the circuit breakers for all the RRUs before turning off the two circuit breakers of power input.
3.4 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)

This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with an APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supply scenarios. APM is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
58
Power Distribution Schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC Power Supply Scenarios
In a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, a power distribution unit (PDU) in the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) converts AC power to DC power and then distributes the power. The PDU supplies two AC power inputs and ten DC power inputs. Figure 3-1and Figure 3-2 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30 in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-15 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.
NOTE
In a scenario with a 220 V AC three-phase power supply, the three AC power inputs do not need to be connected in series using a short-circuiting strip. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 3-1 Power distribution scheme for an APM30 in a scenario with the 220 V AC singlephase power supply
Figure 3-2 Power distribution scheme for an APM30 in a scenario with the 110 V AC dual-livewire power supply
Figure 3-3and Figure 3-4 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.A) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-15 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios.
Figure 3-3 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.A) in a scenario with a 220 V AC single-phase power supply
Figure 3-4 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H (Ver.A) in a scenario with a 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply
Table 3-15 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in an AC power supply scenario Power Supply Specifications of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers of the EPU 3 x 16 A (MCB1) Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers l 1 x 10 A for the heater l 1 x 10 A for the heating film Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses l 6 x 20 A for the remote radio unit (RRU) l 1 x 12 A for the baseband unit (BBU) l 1 x 12 A for the FAN
60
220 V AC singlephase or three-phase power
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Power Supply
Specifications of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers of the EPU 2 x 30 A (MCB)
Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers
Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses l 2 x 4 A for the TM2
110 V AC dual-livewire power
NOTE
(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker (2) TM: transmission device
In the AC power supply scenario, one DC output power is supplied to the transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet uses DC power distribution box to supply power to the transmission device, fan box, and other components in the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply scenario
Table 3-16 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply scenario.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
61
Table 3-16 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply scenario Cabinet APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) and a transmission cabinet Power Supply 220 V AC Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers l 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1 x 6 A (MCB) for the transmission device l 1 x 6 A (MCB) for the FAN
Power Distribution Scheme in the 48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

In a 48 V DC power supply scenario, the external power is supplied to the TMC or the TMC11H (Ver.A), and the direct current distribution unit (DCDU-03B) supplies DC power to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components in the cabinet. Figure 3-6 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC or the TMC11H (Ver.A). Table 3-17 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 3-6 Power distribution scheme for the TMC or the TMC11H (Ver.A) in an 48 V DC power supply scenario
Table 3-17 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) in the 48 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A) Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5 l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBU l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission device
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
62
3.5 Power Distribution Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)

This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with an APM30H (Ver.B) or an APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, 48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heatexchanger cooler.
In a scenario with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the embedded power supply system (EPS) and embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the cabinet converts AC power to DC power and distributes the DC power. The EPS or EPU supplies two AC power outputs: l l One provides AC power for the service outlet unit (SOU). One is connected to the junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.
A power supply unit (PSU) converts the AC power to DC power, which is then supplied to the storage battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and other equipment in the DBS3900.
NOTE
When the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used, the three AC power inputs do not need to be connected in series using a short-circuiting bar. The power distribution principles for this scenario are the same as those for the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario.
Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-18 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios. Figure 3-7 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 220 V AC three-phase power supply scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
63
Figure 3-8 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario
Table 3-18 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the AC power supply scenario Power Supply Specifications of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers of the EPS 3 x 16 A (MCB(1)) Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers l 1 x 16 A (MCB) for the heater and SOU l 1 x 16 A (MCB) for the heater l 1 x 16 A (MCB) for the SOU Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses l 1 x 100 A (MCB) for the BAT(2) l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for the RRU l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the TMC l 1 x 15 A (FUSE (3)) for the FAN l 2 x 15 A (FUSE) for the BBU l 1 x 15 A (FUSE) for the TEC(4). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit. l TM(5): 4 x 15 A (FUSE)
220 V AC singlephase or three-phase power 110 V AC dual-livewire power
1 x 40 A (MCB)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
64

NOTE
(1) MCB: miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: storage battery (3) FUSE: fuse (4) TEC: air conditioner (5) TM: transmission equipment
Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10 show the power distribution schemes for the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC and 110 V AC power supply scenarios. Table 3-19 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios. Figure 3-9 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 220 V AC three-phase power supply scenario
Figure 3-10 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in the 110 V AC dual-livewire power supply scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
65
Table 3-19 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in the AC power supply scenario Power Supply Specifications of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers of the EPS 3 x 20 A (MCB) Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers l 1 x 15 A (MCB) for the heater and SOU l 1 x 15 A (MCB) for the heater l 1 x 15 A (MCB) for the SOU Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses l 1 x 160A (MCB) for the BAT l 6 x 25 A (MCB) for the RRU l 1 x 30 A (MCB) for the TMC l 1 x 15 A (FUSE (3)) for the FAN l 2 x 25 A (FUSE) for the BBU l 1 x 15 A (FUSE) for the TEC l 4 x 15 A (FUSE) for the TM
220 V AC singlephase or three-phase power 110 V AC dual-livewire power
1 x 63 A (MCB)
Table 3-20 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
66
Table 3-20 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply scenario Cabinet Transmission cabinet Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers l 7 x 12 A (MCB) + 1 x 6 A (MCB) for the transmission device l 1 x 6 A (MCB) for the FAN
Table 3-21 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply scenario Table 3-21 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in the AC power supply scenario Cabinet Transmission cabinet Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers l 2 x 6 A (MCB) + 2 x 12 A (MCB) + 4 x 25 A (MCB) for the transmission device l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN

In a 48 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 can be configured with a TMC11H (Ver.B). The direct current distribution unit (DCDU-03B) supplies DC power to the baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), fan box, and other components.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
67
Figure 3-13 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. Table 3-22 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 3-13 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the 48 V DC power supply scenario
Table 3-22 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in the 48 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5 l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBU l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission device l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN
In a 48 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 can be configured with a TMC11H (Ver.C). The DCDU-11B supplies DC power to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components. Figure 3-14 shows the power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C). Table 3-23 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 3-14 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the 48 V DC power supply scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
68
Table 3-23 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in the 48 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers l 6 x 25 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5 l 2 x 25 A (MCB) for the BBU l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the transmission device l 1 x 25 A (MCB) for the FAN
Power Distribution Scheme in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

In a +24 V DC power supply scenario, the power system (DC/DC) in the APM30H (Ver.B) converts the +24 V DC power to 48 V DC power and supplies the power to the DCDU-03B, which supplies power to the BBU, RRU, fan box, and other components. Figure 3-15 shows the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 3-24 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 3-15 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario
Table 3-24 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet Two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5 l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBU l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission device
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
69
3.6 Power Distribution Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06
This section describes the power distribution schemes for a DBS3900 configured with an outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), or an indoor floor installation support (IFS06) in the 110 V AC, 220 V AC, 48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios.
In a scenario with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the power supply equipment in the cabinet (AC to DC) converts AC power to DC power and distributes the DC power. Figure 3-16 shows the power distribution schemes for the OMB and IMB03 in the 220 V AC single-phase and 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenarios. Table 3-25 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses. Figure 3-16 Power distribution schemes in the 110 V AC and 220 V AC power supply scenarios
Table 3-25 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses l 10 A for the baseband unit (BBU) & HEUA l 20 A for the TM l 20 A for the BAT l 12 A for the remote radio unit (RRU) l 4 A for the TM
OMB or IMB03
220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power cable

In a 48 V DC power supply scenario, the input power is supplied to the cabinet, and the direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) supplies power to the baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and other components in the DBS3900.
Figure 3-17 shows the power distribution scheme for the OMB or the IMB03 in a 48 V DC power supply scenario. Table 3-26 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the DBS3900 in the scenarios. Figure 3-17 Power distribution scheme for the OMB or IMB03 in a 48 V DC power supply scenario
Table 3-26 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses Cabinet Power Supply Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers and Fuses l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5 l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBU l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission device l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the FAN
OMB or IMB03
48 V DC
Power Distribution Scheme in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

In a +24 V DC power supply scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06. The power supply system (DC to DC) in the IMB03 converts the +24 V DC power to 48 V DC power and supplies power to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B supplies power to the BBU and RRU. Figure 3-18 shows the power distribution scheme for the IMB03. Table 3-27 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
71
Figure 3-18 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario
Table 3-27 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario Cabinet One IMB03 and one IFS06 Power Supply +24 V DC Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers l 6 x 20 A (MCB) for RRU 0 to RRU 5 l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the BBU l 1 x 12 A (MCB) for the transmission device
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
72
4 DBS3900 Monitoring System
4
About This Chapter
DBS3900 Monitoring System
The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900. 4.1 BBU Monitoring Port The BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input ports and two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs. 4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) The advanced power module (APM30) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet are monitored by various boards. The boards manage the cabinet by collecting alarms from components such as sensors and fans and by using the RS485 serial bus to transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the baseband unit (BBU). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heatexchanger cooler. 4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) The APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet are monitored by various boards. The boards manage the cabinets by collecting alarms from components such as sensors and fans and then using the RS485 serial bus to transmit alarm signals to MON ports on the baseband unit (BBU). 4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06 The outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and the indoor floor installation support (IFS06) are monitored by different boards. The boards or modules report the alarms from components such as sensors and fans to the baseband unit (BBU). 4.5 Customized Alarm Input When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
73
4.1 BBU Monitoring Port

The BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input ports and two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs. Figure 4-1 shows the slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU. Figure 4-1 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU
Table 4-1 lists the ports on the UPEU and UEIU. Table 4-1 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU Slot Slot19 Board UPEU Port EXT-ALM0 Connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector Quantity 1 Description Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 input 0 Port for RS485 input 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 input 0 Port for RS485 input 1
74
EXT-ALM1
MON0
MON1
Slot18
UEIU (optional)
EXT-ALM0
EXT-ALM1
MON0
MON1
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
4.2 Monitoring Schemes of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)

The advanced power module (APM30) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet are monitored by various boards. The boards manage the cabinet by collecting alarms from components such as sensors and fans and by using the RS485 serial bus to transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the baseband unit (BBU). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heatexchanger cooler.
Monitoring Schemes of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario
NOTE
If a DBS3900 is configured with an APM30 or an APM30H (Ver.A), the DBS3900 can work only in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.
Figure 4-2 shows the monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is configured in an APM30 and the DBS3900 is configured with one APM30, one transmission cabinet with heatexchanger cooler (TMC), and one backup battery cabinet (BBC) or with APM30s, one TMC, and two BBCs. For details about the equipment monitored by the APM power monitor unit interface board (APMI) and APM fan monitor unit interface board (AFMU), see descriptions of the APMI and AFMU. l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power monitoring unit (PMU), see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30.
Figure 4-2 Monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H
APM30 COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 ALM0/ALM1 MON0 / MON1 TX RX RS232/RS422 PMU APMI AFMU PMU APM30 APMI AFMU PMU APM30 APMI AFMU
Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination
TMC APMI AFMU
BBU
BBU
BBC Door Status Sensor
TMC APMI AFMU
Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarm signal cable on the DCDU
Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarm signal cable on the DCDU
Door Status Sensor
Door Status Sensor
Figure 4-3 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is configured in an APM30H (Ver.A) and the DBS3900 is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC (Ver.A), and one BBC or one integrated battery backup system (IBBS) or with two APM30Hs, one TMC, and two BBCs or two IBBSs. For details about the equipment monitored by the heat exchange unit type A (HEUA) and HERT power monitoring interface unit (HPMI), see descriptions of the boards. HERT refers to the Huawei Enhanced Radio Technology. l
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
l l
For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).
Figure 4-3 Monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A)
BAT COM COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 MON0 / MON1 TO PMU DB50 RS232/RS422 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination TMC11H(Ver.A) HEUA BBU BBU PMU HPMI HEUA PMU HPMI HEUA PMU HPMI HEUA APM30H(Ver.A) APM30H(Ver.A) APM30H(Ver.A)
BBC/IBBS
TMC11H(Ver.A) HEUA
BBC/IBBS
BBC/IBBS
Door status sensor
Door status sensor
Door status sensor
Monitoring Schemes of the DBS3900 in the 48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 4-4 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in one TMC or a TMC11H (Ver.A) and the DBS3900 is configured with two TMCs or two TMC11Hs (Ver.A). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler version A. l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the central monitoring unit type A (CMUA), see CMUA.
Figure 4-4 Monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the TMC or TMC11H (Ver.A)
TMC/TMC11H TMC/TMC11H COM_IN / COM1 MON0 / MON1 APMI/HEUA/CMUA APMI/HEUA/CMUA
BBU
4.3 Monitoring Scheme of the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)

The APM30H (Ver.B) cabinet and the APM30H (Ver.C) cabinet are monitored by various boards. The boards manage the cabinets by collecting alarms from components such as sensors and fans and then using the RS485 serial bus to transmit alarm signals to MON ports on the baseband unit (BBU).
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
76
Monitoring Scheme of a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Base Station

Only one BBU is configured in a single-mode or dual-mode base station and the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C). If two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C) are configured, the BBU is installed in the basic APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), which is on the left. The central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) is configured in the APM30H (Ver.B) and the central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) is configured in the APM30H (Ver.C). The monitoring schemes for the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are the same. For details of the equipment monitored by the CMUA, CMUE, and the HERT power monitoring interface unit (HPMI), see the descriptions of CMUA, CMUE, and HPMI. HERT is short for Huawei Enhanced Radio Technology. l l l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUE, see CMUE. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B). For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see Power Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 4-5 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) housing the BBU, one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS or with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBSs. Figure 4-5 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS
APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 COM_485 MON0 / MON1 TO PMU DB50 COM PMU HPMI CMUA/CMUE PMU HPMI CMUA/CMUE PMU HPMI CMUA/CMUE APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C)
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) CMUA/CMUE
BBU
BBU
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) CMUA/CMUE
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
Figure 4-6 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) housing the BBU, one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBSs or with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBSs.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
77
Figure 4-6 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and two IBBSs
TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) CMUA/CMUE PMU APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) HPMI CMUA/CMUE TMC11H(Ver.B)/TMC11H(Ver.C) CMUA/CMUE PMU APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) HPMI CMUA/CMUE PMU APM30H(Ver.B)/APM30H(Ver.C) HPMI CMUA/CMUE COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 COM_485 MON0 / MON1 TO PMU DB50 COM BBU BBU
IBBS IBBS CMUA/CMUE IBBS CMUA/CMUE
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
IBBS CMUA/CMUE
CMUA/CMUE
Figure 4-7 shows the monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) that only supplies power to and monitor RRUs. Figure 4-7 Monitoring schemes of the DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) that only supplies power to and monitor RRUs
Figure 4-8 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) housing the BBU. Figure 4-8 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) housing the BBU
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
78
Figure 4-9 shows the monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in a +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B). Figure 4-9 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B)
COM_IN ALM PRESENT MON0 / MON1 EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1 CMUA APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)
Power System (DC/DC)
BBU
Monitoring Scheme of a Triple-Mode Base Station

In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. The basic BBU is BBU0 and is configured in 0# APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) on the left. The extension BBU is BBU1 and is configured in 1# APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) on the right. All the monitoring equipment is connected to BBU0 instead of BBU1, which is the same as in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, as shown in Figure 4-10, Figure 4-11, and Figure 4-12. Figure 4-10 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and two IBBSs
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
79
Figure 4-11 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B) or APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC 11H (Ver.C), and four IBBSs
Figure 4-12 Monitoring schemes of a DBS3900 configured with the TMC11H (Ver.B) orTMC11H (Ver.C)
4.4 Monitoring Schemes for the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06

The outdoor mini box (OMB), indoor mini box (IMB03), and the indoor floor installation support (IFS06) are monitored by different boards. The boards or modules report the alarms from components such as sensors and fans to the baseband unit (BBU).
Monitoring Scheme of a DBS3900 in a Single-Mode or Dual-Mode Scenario

NOTE
For details about the equipment monitored, see descriptions of the monitoring boards or modules. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the heat exchange unit type A (HEUA), see HEUA. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power monitoring unit (PMU), see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the lower IMB03. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power system (DC/DC), see Power Subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 4-13 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 4-14 shows the monitoring
scheme of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a 48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 4-13 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 4-14 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in an OMB in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 4-15 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 configured with the BBU, remote radio units (RRUs), and IMB03 in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. In this scenario, the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely. Figure 4-15 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and IMB03 in a 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
IMB03 RS232/RS485 MON0 / MON1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination BBU
PMU
If the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and indoor centralized rack (ICR), the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRU is installed on the IFS06. Figure 4-16 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 4-17 shows the monitoring scheme of the DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the +24 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 4-16 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
IMB03 COM_IN / COM1 MON0 / MON1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination BBU
IMB03 PMU
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
81
Figure 4-17 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the +24 V DC power supply scenario
ALM PRESENT EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination BBU IMB03
IMB03
Power System (DC/DC)
Monitoring Scheme of the DBS3900 in a Triple-Mode Scenario

NOTE
If the DBS3900 is configured with the OMB or with the BBU, RRUs, and IMB03, the DBS3900 does not work in triple mode. If the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR, the DBS3900 can work in triple mode.
In triple mode, if the DBS3900 is configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR, two BBUs are required. BBU0 is configured in 0#IMB03 and BBU1 is configured in 3#IMB03. BBU0 monitors equipment in 0#IMB03 and 1#IMB03 and BBU1 monitors equipment in 2#IMB03 and 3#IMB03, as shown in Figure 4-18 and Figure 4-19. Figure 4-18 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Figure 4-19 Monitoring scheme of a DBS3900 configured with the BBU, RRUs, and ICR in the 48 V DC power supply scenario
4.5 Customized Alarm Input

When an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to the BBU. Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods: l
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU.

The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see the related initial configuration guide.
Monitoring Board Configuration

If a BBU monitors customer devices, customized alarms about the devices must be reported to the BBU. The configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900 depend on the number of customized alarms, as listed in Table 4-2. Table 4-2 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900 External Power Input -48 V DC/220 V AC Application Scenario Indoor DBS3900 Number of Boolean Signals to be Monitored None 1 to 16 17 to 32 Outdoor DBS3900 None 1 to 16 17 to 32 Monitoring Board Configuration UPEU UPEU+UEIU UPEU+UEIU +EMUA UPEU UPEU+UEIU +(2xUSLP2+SLPU) UPEU+UEIU +EMUA
NOTE
l If backup power is required for the BBU, two UPEUs rather than UPEU+UEIU are configured. l The analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA. l Two USLP2s and one SLPU are delivered in a package. l The EMUA with sensors is configured according to site requirements for the indoor DBS3900.
Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIU

Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of two UPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured for the BBU, which means there are 16 Boolean alarm inputs. This method can be used for the configuration of less than 16 customized alarm inputs. If using this method, connect the device to be monitored to the SLPU for surge protection, and then connect the device to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure 4-20.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
83
Figure 4-20 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU
Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPU and then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU or EUIU through the alarm cable for the BBU. Table 4-3 describes the relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports and the number of customized alarms. Table 4-3 Relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number of customized alarms Pins of the IN0 to IN3 ports 1 2 3 4 USLP2 in the upper slot IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 USLP2 in the lower slot IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3
4+ 4(GND) 6(GND) 6+
5+ 5(GND) 7+ 7(GND)
0+ 0(GND) 2(GND) 2+
1+ 1(GND) 3+ 3(GND)
12+ 12(GND) 14(GND) 14+
13+ 13(GND) 15+ 15(GND)
8+ 8(GND) 10(GND) 10+
9+ 9(GND) 11+ 11(GND)
For details about ports on the USLP2, see 8.8.5 USLP2. For details about the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable, see 7.20 BBU Alarm Cable.
NOTE
The SLPU is configured with two USLP2s by default before delivery when it is used as an alarm signal protection unit. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot. In this case, the USLP2 in the upper slot of the SLPU is not used.
Customized Alarms Collected by the EMUA

The EMUA can be configured for the DBS3900 that requires more than 16 Boolean alarm signals. Each EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
84
Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU reports the alarms to the CMUA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 4-21. Figure 4-21 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (1)
SENSOR
Customized alarms are collected by the EMUA, transferred by the PMU, and then reported to the CMUA. Finally, the alarms are transferred to the RRU through the MON port, achieving alarm monitoring on the RRU. For detailed cable connections, see Figure 4-22. Figure 4-22 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (2)
RRU
ALM
COM_OUT
COM_IN
COM_IN
COM_OUT
CMUA
PMU EMUA
RS485
SENSOR
For details about the position of the input port on the EMUA and cable connection between the EMUA and the sensor, see EMUA User Guide.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
85
5 BBU3900 Equipment
5
About This Chapter
The BBU3900 has the following functions: l l l l l l l
BBU3900 Equipment
This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels, module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.
Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC/RNC Provides CPRI ports for the communication with the RF modules Provides USB ports, which facilitates automatic base station upgrade by allowing a USB disk to be used for software installation and data configuration Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 Processes uplink and downlink data Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing Provides the system clock
5.1 Exterior of the BBU3900 The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high. 5.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900 This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles, functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
86
5 BBU3900 Equipment
5.1 Exterior of the BBU3900

The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high. The dimensions (W x D x H) of the BBU3900 are 442 mm x 310 mm x 86 mm. Figure 5-1 shows the BBU3900. Figure 5-1 BBU3900
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is unique to a network element (NE) for identification, and is used during the commissioning of the base station. l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a label and the mounting ears of the BBU. Figure 5-2 shows the position of the ESN. Figure 5-2 The position of the ESN (1)
If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the mounting ears of the BBU. Figure 5-3 shows the position of the ESN.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
87
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-3 The position of the ESN (2)
5.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900

This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles, functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.
5.2.1 Slot Assignment of the BBU3900

This section describes slot assignment of the BBU3900 in the GSM Only (hereinafter referred to as GO), UMTS Only (hereinafter referred to as UO), LTE Only (hereinafter referred to as LO), GSM+UMTS (hereinafter referred to as GU), GSM+LTE (hereinafter referred to as GL), UMTS+LTE (hereinafter referred to as UL), (GSM+UMTS)+(LTE Only) (hereinafter referred to as GU+LO), (GSM+LTE)+(UMTS Only) (hereinafter referred to as GL+UO) scenarios.
Slots of the BBU3900

The slot assignment of the BBU3900 in GO mode, BBU3900 in GU mode, BBU3900 in UO mode, BBU3900 in LO mode, BBU3900 in GL mode, BBU3900 in UL mode, BBU3900 in GU +LO mode, and BBU3900 in GL+UO mode are the same, as shown in Figure 5-4. Figure 5-4 Slots of the BBU3900
BBU3900 Working in GO Mode

Table 5-1 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GO mode.
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-1 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GO mode Board GTMU Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 1 Installation Slot Slots 5 and 6 Remarks It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied). It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 1. The 1 U GPS/ GLONASS receiver is configured in slot 1 (with slots 0 and 1 occupied). UTRP Optional 1 Slot 0 or 4 It is preferentially configured in slot 4. -
FAN UPEU
Mandatory Mandatory
1 2
Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 1
UEIU
Optional
Slot 18
Figure 5-5 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GO mode. Figure 5-5 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GO mode
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
89
5 BBU3900 Equipment
BBU3900 Working in UO Mode

Table 5-2 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UO mode. Table 5-2 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UO mode Board WMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 2 Installation Slot Slot 6 or 7 Remarks A single WMPT is preferentially configured in slot 7.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
90
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Board WBBP
Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory
Maximum Quantity 6
Installation Slot Slots 0 to 5
Remarks It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is preferentiall y configured in slot 3 or 2 in descending order of priority. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is preferentiall y configured in slot 3, 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5 in descending order of priority. If a WBBPd is required, it is preferentially configured in slot 3 or 2 in descending order of priority. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that two WBBPs are installed in slots 2 and 3. At least, one of the two WBBPs is WBBPd.
FAN UPEU
Mandatory Mandatory
1 2
It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is preferentially configured in slot 19.
91
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Board UEIU UTRP
Optional/ Mandatory Optional Optional
Maximum Quantity 1 4
Installation Slot Slot 18 Slots 0, 1, 4, and 5
Remarks It is preferentially configured in slot 4, 5, 0, or 1 in descending order of priority. It is preferentially configured in slot 1. The 1 U GPS/ GLONASS receiver is configured in slot 1 (with slots 0 and 1 occupied).
USCU
Optional
Slot 1 or 0
Figure 5-6 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UMTS Only mode. Figure 5-6 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UO mode
BBU3900 Working in LO Mode

Table 5-3 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in LO mode.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
92
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-3 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in LO mode Board LMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 2 Installation Slot Slot 6 or 7 Remarks A single LMPT is configured in slot 7. A single LBBP is preferentially configured in slot 3. The priorities of slot assignment are as follows: slot 3, slot 2, slot 1, slot 0, slot 4, slot 5. FAN UPEU Mandatory Mandatory 1 2 Slot 16 Slot 18 or 19 It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 4. A single USCU is preferentially configured in slot 5. A USCU that occupies 1 U space is configured in slots 5 and 4. If slots 4 and 5 are occupied, a single USCU is configured in slot 1. In this situation, a USCU that occupies 1 U space is configured in slots 1 and 0.
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 5
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 1
Slot 18 Slot 4 or 5
USCU
Optional
Slot 0, 1, 4, or 5
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
93
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-7 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in LO mode. Figure 5-7 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in LO mode
BBU3900 Working in GU Mode

Table 5-4 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GU mode. Table 5-4 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GU mode Board WMPT GTMU Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 1 1 Installation Slot Slot 7 Slots 5 and 6 Remarks It is configured only in slot 7. It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied).
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
94
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Board WBBP
Maximum Quantity 5
Installation Slot Slots 0 to 4
Remarks It is configured in slot 3 by default. l If more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is preferentiall y configured in slot 3 or 2 in descending order of priority. l If no more CPRI ports are required, the WBBP is preferentiall y configured in slot 3, 2, 0, 1, or 4 in descending order of priority. If a WBBPd is required, it is preferentially configured in slot 3 or 2 in descending order of priority. If five or more WBBPs are required, ensure that two WBBPs are installed in slots 2 and 3. At least, one of the two WBBPs is WBBPd.
FAN UPEU
Mandatory Mandatory
1 2
It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
95
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Board UEIU UTRP
Optional/ Mandatory Optional Optional
Maximum Quantity 1 2
Installation Slot Slot 18 Slot 0 or 4
Remarks It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The slot priority of the GO UTRP is higher than that of the UO UTRP.
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 4. -
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
Figure 5-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GU mode. Figure 5-8 Typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GU mode
BBU3900 Working in GL Mode

Table 5-5 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GL mode. Table 5-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in GL mode Board LMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 1 Installation Slot Slot 7 Remarks It is configured only in slot 7.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
96
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Board GTMU
Maximum Quantity 1
Installation Slot Slots 5 and 6
Remarks It is configured only in slot 6 (with slots 5 and 6 occupied). It is preferentially configured in slot 3. The priorities of slot assignment are as follows: slot 3, slot 2, slot 1, slot 0, slot 4
LBBP
Mandatory
Slots 0 to 4
FAN UPEU
Mandatory Mandatory
1 2
It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 4, 0, or 1 in descending order of priority. The slot priority of the GO UTRP is higher than that of the LO UTRP.
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 2
Slot 18 Slot 0 or 4
USCU
Optional
Slot 0 or 4
It is preferentially configured in slot 1. The 1 U GPS/ GLONASS receiver is configured in slot 1 (with slots 0 and 1 occupied).
UBRI
Optional
Slot 2
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
97
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in GL mode. Figure 5-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 working in GL mode
BBU3900 Working in UL Mode

Table 5-6 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL mode. Table 5-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 working in UL mode Board LMPT WMPT LBBP Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 1 1 5 Installation Slot Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 0, 1, 2, 4, or 5 Remarks It is configured only in slot 6. It is configured only in slot 7. A single LBBP is configured only in slot 2. If more LBBPs are required, the LBBP is preferentially configured in slot 2, 0, 1, 4, or 5 in descending order of priority.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
98
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Board WBBP
Maximum Quantity 4
Installation Slot Slot 0, 1, 3, 4, or 5
Remarks A single WBBP is configured only in slot 3. If more LBBPs are required, the WBBP is preferentially configured in slot 3, 0, 1, 4, or 5 in descending order of priority. If a WBBPd is required, it is configured only in slot 3.
FAN UPEU
Mandatory Mandatory
1 2
It is configured only in slot 16. A single UPEU is configured only in slot 19. It is preferentially configured in slot 4. The slot priority of the UO UTRP is higher than that of the LO UTRP.
UEIU UTRP
Optional Optional
1 2
Slot 18 Slot 4 or 5
USCU
Optional
Slot 4 or 5
It is preferentially configured in slot 4.
Figure 5-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 working in UL mode.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
99
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 working in UL mode
BBU3900 Working in GU+LO Mode

BBU3900 Working in GU Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in the BBU3900 working in GU mode. BBU3900 Working in LO Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in the BBU3900 working in LO mode.
BBU3900 Working in GL+UO Mode

BBU3900 Working in GL Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in the BBU3900 working in GL mode. BBU3900 Working in UO Mode shows the configuration principles of the boards in the BBU3900 working in UO mode.
5.2.2 WMPT
The WCDMA Main Processes and Transmission unit (WMPT) of the BBU3900 processes the signals and manages the resources for other boards.
Panel
Figure 5-11 shows the panel of the WMPT. Figure 5-11 Panel of the WMPT
Functions
The WMPT has the following functions: l Provides Operation and Maintenance (OM) functions such as configuration management, equipment management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active/ standby switchover and provides OM channels connected to the OMC (LMT or M2000)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
5 BBU3900 Equipment
l l l l l
Provides the reference clock Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900 Provides USB ports, one of which facilitates automatic base station upgraded when a USB disk is inserted during software installation and data configuration Provides four E1s/T1s which support ATM and IP protocols Provides one FE electrical port and one FE optical port which support the IP protocol
LEDs
Table 5-7 describes the LEDs on the WMPT panel. Table 5-7 LEDs on the WMPT panel Label RUN Color Green Status ON Meaning The power input is available, but the board is faulty. The power supply is unavailable. The board in normal configuration is running properly. The software is being loaded to the board, or the board is not in use. No alarm is generated. The board has alarms on hardware. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.
OFF 1s ON and 1s OFF
0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF
ALM
Red
OFF ON
ACT
Green
ON OFF
In addition to the previous three LEDs, the WMPT has another six LEDs indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and the commissioning Ethernet port. The six LEDs have no silk screen and are on both sides of each of the three ports. Figure 5-12 shows the LEDs beside the three ports.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
101
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-12 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT
Table 5-8 describes the LEDs and their status. Table 5-8 LEDs and their status LED LEDs beside the FE1 optical port Color Green (LINK) Status ON OFF Green (ACT) Blinking OFF LEDs beside the FE0 electrical port Green (LINK) ON OFF Yellow (ACT) Blinking OFF ETH Green (LINK) ON OFF Yellow (ACT) Blinking OFF Meaning The connections are functional. The connections are faulty. Data transmission is ongoing. No data transmission is ongoing. The connections are functional. The connections are faulty. Data transmission is ongoing. No data transmission is ongoing. The connections are functional. The connections are faulty. Data transmission is ongoing. No data transmission is ongoing.
Ports
Table 5-9 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-9 Ports on the WMPT panel Label E1/T1 FE0 FE1 GPS ETH USB TST RST Connector Type DB26 connector RJ45 connector SFP connector SMA connector RJ45 connector USB connector USB connector Description E1/T1 port FE electrical port FE optical port Obligate Commissioning Ethernet port USB loading port USB testing port Resetting the BBU
DIP Switches
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 for setting the E1/T1 working mode and SW2 for setting the protection grounding for the E1/T1 cables receiving 4-way signals. Figure 5-13 shows the DIP switches on the WMPT. Figure 5-13 DIP switches on the WMPT
Table 5-10 and Table 5-11 describe the settings of SW1 and SW2.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
103
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-10 Settings of SW1 DIP Switch SW1 DIP Status 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON T1 Mode The E1 impedance is set to 120 ohms. The E1 impedance is set to 75 ohms. Disabled Description
ON
ON
ON
ON
Other settings of the DIP bits
Table 5-11 Settings of SW2 DIP Switch SW2 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON Balanced Mode Unbalanced Mode Disabled Description
CAUTION
All the DIP bits of SW2 are set to OFF by default. When four E1 links are faulty, you should set all the DIP bits of SW2 to ON so that the faults are rectified.
5.2.3 GTMU
The GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basic transmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power supply, and controls and manages the entire base station.
Panel
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-14 GTMU panel
Figure 5-15 GTMUb panel
Functions
The GTMU and GTMUb have the following functions: l l l l l l l l l Controls and manages the base station Supports fault management system, configuration management system, performance management system, and security management system Monitors the fans and power modules Provides and manages the clock source of the base station in centralized mode Provides the clock output for test Provides the FE port for maintenance on the OM system Supports transmission through four E1s and two FEs Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs The GTMUb supports interconnected BBUs.
LEDs
Table 5-12 describes the LEDs on the GTMU. Table 5-12 LEDs on the GTMU LED RUN Color Green Status ON OFF Description The board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
105
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
5 BBU3900 Equipment
LED
Color
Status ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 2s and OFF for 2s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s
Description The board is running properly. The board is being tested. Software is being loaded to the board. An alarm is generated, indicating a running fault. The board is running properly. The board is in the active state. The board is in the standby state.
ALM
Red
ON OFF
ACT
Green
ON OFF
Besides the preceding three LEDs, there are LEDs indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port and commissioning port. Each of the LEDs is positioned near the relevant port without any label on the panel of the board. Table 5-13 describes the LEDs and their status. Table 5-13 LEDs and their status LED LIU0 to LIU3 Color Green Status ON ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s OFF CPRI0 to CPRI5 Green Red ON ON Description The link is in the idle state. An E1/T1 remote alarm is generated. The link is functional. The CPRI link is functional. The optical module fails to receive signals. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted.
ETH
Green (LINK LED on the left)
ON OFF
Orange (ACT LED on the right)
Blinking
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
106
5 BBU3900 Equipment
LED
Color
Status OFF
Description No data is being transmitted. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted. This is the LED of the reserved port. This is the LED of the reserved port.
FE0
ON OFF
Orange (ACT LED on the right)
Blinking OFF
FE1(GTMUb)
ON OFF
Green (ACT LED on the right)
Blinking OFF
M_S (GTMUb) EXT (GTMUb)
Ports
Table 5-14 describes the ports on the GTMU. Table 5-14 Ports on the GTMU Label CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP female Description Data transmission port interconnected to the RFU. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals Obligate Local maintenance and debugging port Connected to the routers in the equipment room through FE cables to transmit network information
EXT (GTMUb) ETH FE0
SFP female RJ45 connector RJ45 connector
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
107
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Label FE1
Connector DLC connector
Description Connected to the routers in the equipment room through optical cables to transmit network information Used for automatic software upgrade through the USB disk Provides a reference clock for the tester Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs
USB TST E1/T1
USB connector USB connector DB26 female connector
The RST button on the panel of the GTMU is used for resetting the board.
DIP Switches
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and S2 must be set together. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows: l l l l l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 5-15 provides details on the DIP switch. S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 cables. Table 5-16 provides details on the DIP switch. S3 is reserved. S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 5-17 provides details on the DIP switch. S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 5-18 provides details on the DIP switch.
Table 5-15 Details of the DIP Switch S1 DIP Switch S1 Bit Status 1 ON OFF ON 2 ON ON OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF Others 4 OFF OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm. The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm. The T1 resistance is set to 100 ohm. Unavailable Description
NOTE
Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept as out-of-factory state, without any manual setting on site. The out-offactory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
108
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-16 Details of the DIP Switch S2 DIP Switch S2 Bit Status 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF By default, all the DIP bits of S2 are set to OFF in all the modes. When the four E1 RX links in 75 ohm have errors, all the bits of S2 must be set to ON to rectify the faults on the E1 links. Unavailable Description
ON
ON
ON
ON
Others
Table 5-17 Details of the DIP Switch S4 DIP Switch S4 Bit Status 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 ON OFF Others 4 ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass Not supporting E1 bypass Unavailable Description
Table 5-18 Details of the DIP Switch S5 DIP Switch S5 Bit Status 1 ON OFF 2 ON ON 3 ON ON 4 ON OFF Not supporting E1 bypass Supporting E1 bypass of level-1 cascaded base stations Supporting E1 bypass of level-2 cascaded base stations Supporting E1 bypass of level-3 cascaded base stations Description
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
109
5 BBU3900 Equipment
DIP Switch
Bit Status 1 ON 2 ON 3 OFF 4 OFF
Description
Supporting E1 bypass of level-4 cascaded base stations Supporting E1 bypass of level-5 cascaded base stations
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
5.2.4 LMPT
The LTE Main Processing & Transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system in terms of OM and signaling processing and provides the clock for the BBU3900.
Panel
Figure 5-16 shows the LMPT. Figure 5-16 LMPT
LMPT
LMPTb
TX
RX
TX
RX
RUN ALM ACT
SFP 0
SFP 1
USB TST
ETH
FE/GE0
FE/GE1
RST
GPS
Functions
The LMPT has the following functions: l l l l Enabling configuration management, device management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and radio source management Enabling control for the boards in the system Providing the system clock Enabling signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW
LEDs
There are three LEDs on the panel of the LMPT. Table 5-19 describes the LEDs on the LMPT.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
110
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-19 LEDs on the panel of the LMPT Label RUN Color Green Status On Off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Description The board is powered on but it is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. Data is being loaded to the board, the board is not started, or the board is running in a secure version. The board is being loaded, the board is not started, or the board is running properly. An alarm is reported, indicating a fault in the board. The board is working properly. An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you must locate the fault before replacing the board. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode. The OML link is disrupted.
Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red On
Off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
ACT
Green
On Off Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
The board is being tested, such as an RRU Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) test through a USB disk. When an upgrade through a USB disk is implemented, the ACT LED does not blink.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
111
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Besides the preceding three LEDs, some other LEDs used for indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, commissioning Ethernet port have no silkscreen on the board. They are near the ports. Table 5-20 describes the LEDs. Table 5-20 Ports and LEDs Label SFP0 and SFP1 Color Green (LINK) Status On Off Orange (ACT) Blinking Off ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking Off Green (LINK) On Off FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Green (LINK) On Off Orange (ACT) Blinking Off Description The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted.
Port
Table 5-21 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
112
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-21 Ports on the panel of the LMPT Label SFP0 and SFP1 Connector Type LC Quantity 2 Application FE/GE optical port, used for connecting transmission equipment or gateway equipment Software loading Testing Commissioning FE/GE electrical port, used for connecting transmission equipment or gateway equipment Receiving GPS signals Resetting the BBU3900
USB TST ETH FE/GE0 to FE/GE1
USB USB RJ45 connector RJ45 connector
1 1 1 2
GPS RST
SMA -
1 1
NOTE
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input or output. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously. SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are not used simultaneously.
5.2.5 WBBP
The WCDMA Baseband Process Unit (WBBP) in the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
Panel
The WBBP has three types of panels, as shown in Figure 5-17, Figure 5-18, and Figure 5-19. Figure 5-17 Panel of the WBBPa
Figure 5-18 Panel of the WBBPb
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
113
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-19 Panel of the WBBPd
Function
The WBBP has the following functions: l l l l Provides the CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RF module, and supports the CPRI interface in 1+1 backup mode. Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals. The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board. The WBBPd supports the IC function of uplink data when installed in slot 2 or slot 3.
Table 5-22 describes the specifications of the WBBP.

NOTE
The baseband board in slot 2 or slot 3 could transfer the received CPRI data to other boards.
Table 5-22 Specifications of the WBBP Board Number of Cells 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 Number of UL CEs 128 64 128 256 384 192 384 256 Number of DL CEs 256 64 128 256 384 192 384 256 Baseband Transfer Capacity N/A Twelve 1T2R cells Twelve 1T2R cells Twelve 1T2R cells Twelve 1T2R cells Twenty-four 1T2R cells Twenty-four 1T2R cells Twenty-four 1T2R cells
WBBPa WBBPb1 WBBPb2 WBBPb3 WBBPb4 WBBPd1 WBBPd2 WBBPd3
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
114
5 BBU3900 Equipment
LED
There are three LEDs on the panel of the WBBP. Table 5-23 describes the LEDs on the WBBP and their status. Table 5-23 LEDs on the panel of the WBBP and their status Label RUN Color Green Status On Off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s ACT Green On Off ALM Red Off On Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. Software is being loaded to the board. The board is running. The board is not in use. The board is running properly. The board has a hardware alarm.
The WBBPa and the WBBPb both provide three LEDs indicating the status of the Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) links, which are below the SFP ports. The WBBPd provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links, which are above the SFP ports. Table 5-24 describes the LEDs. Table 5-24 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links Label TX RX Color Red/green Status Off Description No cable is connected to the optical module, or the optical module is powered off. The CPRI link is functional, and the RF module has no hardware faulty. The optical module is not in position, or the CPRI link is faulty.
Steady green
Steady red
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
115
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Label
Color
Status Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)
Description The RF module on the CPRI link has a hardware fault, and the RF module needs to be replaced. A VSWR alarm, antenna alarm, or external alarm is generated on the RF unit on the CPRI link.
Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Ports
Table 5-25 describes the three CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb. Table 5-25 Ports on the panel of the WBBPa and WBBPb Label CPRIx Connector Type SFP female Description Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals.
Table 5-26 describes the six CPRI ports on the panel of the WBBPd. Table 5-26 Ports on the panel of the WBBPd Label CPRI0, CPRI1, CPRI2, CPRI3/ EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1, CPRI5/EIH2 Connector Type SFP female Description Data transmission port interconnected to the RF module. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals.
5.2.6 LBBP
The LTE BaseBand Processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes the baseband signals.
Panel
The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 5-20 and Figure 5-21.
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-20 Panel of the LBBPb

LBBP
LBBPb
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RUN ALM ACT
CPRI 0
CPRI 1
CPRI 2
CPRI 3
CPRI 4
CPRI 5
Figure 5-21 Panel of the LBBPc

LBBP
LBBPc
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RUN ALM ACT
CPRI 0
CPRI 1
CPRI 2
CPRI 3
CPRI 4
CPRI 5
NOTE
The LBBPc can be used in both LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes, and the LBBPb can be used in only LTE FDD mode.
Function
The LBBP has the following functions: l l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals Provides CPRI ports connected to RF modules
Table 5-27 describes the specifications of the LBBP working in LTE FDD mode. Table 5-27 Specifications of the LBBP Board LBBPb Number of Cells 3 1 1 LBBPc 3 3 1 Bandwidth of the Cell 10M 20M 10M 20M 10M 20M Antenna Configuration 2T2R 2T2R 4T4R 2T2R 4T4R 4T4R
Table 5-28 describes the specifications of the LBBP working in LTE TDD mode. Table 5-28 Specifications of the LBBP Board LBBPc
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Number of Cells 3
Bandwidth of the Cell 20M
Antenna Configuration 2T2R

117
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Board
Number of Cells 3 1 1
Bandwidth of the Cell 10M 20M 10M/20M
Antenna Configuration 4T4R 4T4R 8T8R
LED
There are three LEDs on the panel of the LBBP. Table 5-29 describes the LEDs on the LBBP. Table 5-29 LEDs on the LBBP Label RUN Color Green Status On Off Description The board is powered on but is faulty. The board is not powered on, or it is faulty. The board is running properly. Data is being loaded to the board, or the board is not started. An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced. An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you must identify the fault before replacing the board. The board is running properly. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
118
On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s ALM Red On
Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Off ACT Green On Off
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
5 BBU3900 Equipment
The LBBP provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDs are positioned above the SFP ports. Table 5-30 describes the LEDs. Table 5-30 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links Label TX RX Color Red/Green Status Steady green Steady red Description The CPRI link is available. The optical module may fail to send or receive signals. (The failure may be caused by a faulty optical module or disconnected optical fiber.) The RF unit in the CPRI link has a hardware fault. The CPRI link is out of lock (The fault may be caused by mutual lock of dual-mode clock sources or mismatched data rate over CPRI interfaces, and you are advised to check the system configuration) or the VSWR alarm is reported on the RRUs in the CPRI link (because the USB storage disk is under test). The SFP module is not in position or the optical module is powered off.
Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)
Off
Port
Table 5-31 describes the ports on the panel of the LBBP.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
119
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-31 Ports on the LBBP Label CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP female Quantity 6 Description The CPRI ports connect to the LRRUs or LRFUs for transmitting service data, clock signals, and synchronization information
5.2.7 FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of the fan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
Panels
The FAN unit has two types of exterior, which are shown in Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-23. Figure 5-22 FAN panel
Figure 5-23 FANc panel
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
120
5 BBU3900 Equipment
NOTE
The FANc has FANc label, which is different from the FAN.
Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions: l l l l l Controls the fan speed. Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control processing unit. Monitors the temperature at the air inlet. Dissipates heat. The FANc supports the function of reading and writing the information reported by the electronic label unit.
LED
The FAN panel has only one LED, which indicates the operating status of the fans. Table 5-32 describes the LED. Table 5-32 LED on the FAN panel Label STATE Color Green State On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On for 1s and off for 1s Red Off On for 1s and off for 1s Meaning The module is not registered, and no alarm is reported. The module is running properly. No alarm is generated. The unit is reporting alarms.
5.2.8 UPEU
A universal power and environment interface unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts 48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power.
Panel
UPEUs fall into three types: universal power and environment interface unit type A (UPEUa), universal power and environment interface unit type B (UPEUb), and universal power and environment interface unit type C (UPEUc). The UPEUa and UPEUc convert 48 V DC power into +12 V DC power, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power. Figure 5-24, Figure 5-25, and Figure 5-26 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, and UPEUc respectively.
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-24 Panel of the UPEUa
(1) BBU power switch
Figure 5-25 Panel of the UPEUb
Figure 5-26 Panel of the UPEUc
NOTE
The UPEUa can be distinguished from the UPEUb by observing the silkscreen on the panel. The silkscreen on the UPEUa is 48V and the silkscreen on the UPEUb is +24V. The UPEUa can also be distinguished from the UPEUc because a UPEUc label is on the UPEUc.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
122
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Function
The UPEU performs the following functions: l l Converts 48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC power, which is the only operating voltage of the BBU. Provides ports for two RS485 signal inputs and eight Boolean signal inputs. The Boolean signal inputs can be dry contact type or open collector (OC) type.
Table 5-33 lists the specifications of the UPEUs. Table 5-33 Specifications of the UPEUs Board UPEUa UPEUc Output Power A UPEUa has an output power of 300 W. A UPEUc has an output power of 360 W and two UPEUc boards have a total output power of 650 W. A UPEUa and a UPEUc have a total output power of 360 W. Backup 1+1 backup 1+1 backup
UPEUa+UPEUc
NOTE
If a UPEUa is replaced with a UPEUc, the power consumption changes in the monitoring of the power consumption on the M2000. The monitoring result of the power consumption varies depending on the output power and the sampling method. In this situation, the UPEUc and the UPEUa adopt different sampling methods and therefore the monitored power consumption may decrease after a UPEUa is replaced with a UPEUc.
Indicator
The UPEU has one indicator, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 5-34 lists the indications of the indicator in different status. Table 5-34 Indicator on the UPEU Silkscreen RUN Color Green Status Steady on Off Indication The board is functional. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
123
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Port
A UPEU provides ports for two RS485 signal inputs and eight Boolean signal inputs. Figure 5-27 shows the positions of UPEUs in the BBU. Figure 5-27 Positions of UPEUs in the BBU
Table 5-35 describes the ports on the UPEU. Table 5-35 Ports Slot Slot 19 Silkscree n +24V or 48V EXTALM0 EXTALM1 MON0 MON1 Slot 18 +24V or 48V EXTALM0 EXTALM1 MON0 MON1 Connecto r Type 3V3 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector 3V3 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector RJ45 connector Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Remarks +24 V DC or 48 V DC power input Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 signal input 0 Port for RS485 signal input 1 +24 V DC or 48 V DC power input Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 signal input 0 Port for RS485 signal input 1
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
124
5 BBU3900 Equipment
5.2.9 UEIU
The Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) transmits monitoring and alarm signals from the external devices to the main control and transmission unit.
Panel
Figure 5-28 shows the panel of the UEIU. Figure 5-28 Panel of the UEIU
Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions: l l l Provides two ports, each transmitting one RS485 signal. Provides two ports, each transmitting four Boolean signals. The Boolean signal inputs can be dry contact type or open collector (OC) type. Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control and transmission unit.
Ports
The UEIU is configured in slot 18. It provides four ports with two ports transmitting two RS485 input signals and the other two ports transmitting eight Boolean signals. Table 5-36 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU. Table 5-36 Ports on the panel of the UEIU Slot slot 18 Label EXTALM0 EXTALM1 MON0 MON1 Connect or RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Quanti ty 1 1 1 1 Description No.0 to 3 Boolean signal input ports No.4 to 7 Boolean signal input ports No.0 RS485 signal input port No.1 RS485 signal input port
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
125
5 BBU3900 Equipment
5.2.10 UTRP
This describes the Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board. As the transmission extension board of the BBU3900, the UTRP provides eight E1s/T1s, one unchannelized STM-1/ OC-3 port, four electrical ports, or two optical ports.
Specification
Table 5-37 describes the specifications of the UTRP. Table 5-37 Specifications of the UTRP Board UTRP2 UTRP3 Sub-board/Board Type UEOC UAEC Port Two universal FE/ GE optical port Ports for eight channels of ATM over E1/T1 Ports for eight channels of IP over E1/T1 Ports for eight channels of TDM over E1/T1 Port for one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 Four universal FE/ GE electrical ports Mode UMTS UMTS
UTRP4
UIEC
UMTS
UTRPb4
No sub-board
GSM and LTE
UTRP6
UUAS
UMTS
UTRP9
UQEC
UMTS
Panels
Figure 5-29 shows the panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports. Figure 5-29 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports
Figure 5-30 shows the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s. Figure 5-30 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s
UTRP
E1/T1(0-3) E1/T1(4-7)
RUN ALM ACT
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
126
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-31 shows the panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1. Figure 5-31 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1
Figure 5-32 shows the panel of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports. Figure 5-32 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports
Functions
The UTRP has the following functions: l l l l The UTRP2 provides two 100M/1000M Ethernet optical ports, performs functions of the MAC layer, receives and transmits data on Ethernet links, and analyzes the MAC address. The UTRP3 provides eight E1s/T1s and performs inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing on a single ATM cell flow on the eight E1/T1 links. The UTRP4 provides eight E1s/T1s, frames and deframes HDLC frames, and allocates and controls the 256 HDLC timeslot channels. The UTRP4 provides an E1/T1 port for four TDM transmission links in GSM mode and provides a port for four transmission links in another mode for co-transmission in a dualmode base station. The UTRP6 supports one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port. The UTRP9 provides four 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet electrical ports and performs the functions of the MAC layer and physical layer. The cold backup is supported.
l l l
LEDs
Table 5-38 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UTRP. Table 5-38 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP Label RUN Color Green Status ON Description The board has power input, but the board is faulty.
127
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Label
Color
Status OFF
Description The board has no power input, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. The board is not configured or is loading software. The board is in the offline state or under test. The board is reporting alarms. The board is running properly. The board is reporting a minor alarm. The board is reporting a major alarm. The board is reporting a critical alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON for 2s and OFF for 2s ALM Red ON or blinking rapidly OFF ON for 2s and OFF for 2s ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ACT Green ON OFF
The ACT indicator on the UTRPb4 board in GSM mode has different status as the ACT indicator on other boards, as shown in Table 5-39. Table 5-39 Status of the ACT indicator on the UTRPb4 board in GSM mode Status of the ACT Indicator Steady on Before Configurations Take Effect The board works in active mode, and none of the E1 ports in GSM mode is functional After Configurations Take Effect The board works in active mode
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
128
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Status of the ACT Indicator Steady off On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
Before Configurations Take Effect The board works in standby mode The board serves as an active board, and some or all E1 ports in GSM mode are functional
After Configurations Take Effect The board works in standby mode -
UTRP2 and UTRP9 provide two LEDs for indicating the status of the current link. Table 5-40 describes the LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9. Table 5-40 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9 Label LINK Color Green Status ON OFF ACT Orange Blinking OFF Description The link is properly connected. The link is disconnected. The link is receiving or transmitting data. The link is not receiving or transmitting data.
Ports
Table 5-41 describes the ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports. Table 5-41 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports Label FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Port Type FE/GE optical port Quantity 2 Connector Type SFP connector
Table 5-42 describes the ports on the UTRP3 and UTRP4 supporting eight E1s/T1s. Table 5-42 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s Label E1/T1 Port Type E1/T1 port Quantity 2 Connector Type DB26 connector
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
129
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-43 describes the port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1. Table 5-43 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1 Label STM-1/OC-3 Port Type STM-1/OC-3 port Quantity 1 Connector Type SFP connector
Table 5-44 describes the ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports. Table 5-44 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports Label FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 Port Type FE/GE electrical port Quantity 4 Connector Type RJ-45 connector
DIP Switches
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9. The UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4 has three DIP switches numbered from SW1 to SW3. SW1 and SW2 are used to set the grounding status of the eight E1s. SW3 is used to set matched impedance for the eight E1s. Figure 5-33 shows the DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4, Figure 5-34 shows the DIP switch on the UTRPb4. Figure 5-33 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
130
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-34 DIP switch on the UTRPb4
Table 5-45, Table 5-46, and Table 5-47 describe how to set the DIP switches on the UTRP. Table 5-45 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW1 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON Balanced Mode Unbalanced Mode Disabled Description
Table 5-46 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW2 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON Balanced Mode Unbalanced Mode Disabled Description
CAUTION
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF by default. SW1 corresponds to E1s No.4 to No.7 and SW2 corresponds to E1s No.0 to No.3.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
131
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-47 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW3 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 ON OFF 4 ON OFF T1 Mode The E1 impedance is set to 120 ohms. The E1 impedance is set to 75 ohms. Disabled Description
ON
ON
ON
ON
5.2.11 USCU
This section describes the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU).
Panel
There are two types of USCU: USCUb0, USCUb1 and USCUb2, as shown in Figure 5-35 and Figure 5-36. Figure 5-35 Panel of the USCUb0/USCUb1 (0.5 U)
Figure 5-36 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)
(1) GPS port
(2) RGPS port
(3) TOD port
(4) M-1PPS port
(5) BITS port
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
132
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Functions
The USCU has the following functions: l l l l The USCU provides interface for an external RGPS device (such as a reused device of the operator), Metro1000 device, BITS device, and TOD input. The USCUb0 does not incorporate the satellite card. The USCUb1 has the GPS receiver. It is used for clock synchronization or obtaining accurate clock signals from transmission devices. A dual-satellite receiver is configured in a USCUb2, which supports GPS, GLONASS, or COMPASS clock signals.
LED
Table 5-48 and Table 5-49 describe the LEDs on the USCU. Table 5-48 LEDs on the USCU LED RUN Color Green Status On Off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red Off On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Description There is power supply, and the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. Software is being loaded to the board, or the board is not configured. The board is running properly, and no alarm is generated. An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced. An alarm is generated. The alarm may be caused due to faults in the related boards or ports. Therefore, whether the board needs to be replaced cannot be determined. The serial port for communication between the USCU and the main control board is enabled. The serial port for communication between the USCU and the main control board is disabled.
133
ACT
Green
On
Off
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-49 LEDs on the TOD port Color Green Meaning On: The TOD port is configured as the input port. On: The TOD port is configured as the output port. Default Configuration The green LED of the TOD0 port is off, and the yellow LED of the TOD0 port is on. The yellow LED of the TOD1 port is off, and the green LED of the TOD1 port is on.
Yellow
Ports
Table 5-50 describes the ports on the USCU. Table 5-50 Ports on the USCU Port GPS port RGPS port TOD0 port TOD1 port BITS port Connector SMA coaxial connector PCB welded wiring terminal RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector SMA coaxial connector SMA coaxial connector Description Receives GPS signals Receives RGPS signals Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals, and receives TOD signals from the M1000 Receives BITS clock signals, and supports adaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock reference source Receives 1PPS signals from the M1000
M-1PPS port
5.2.12 UBRI
The Universal Baseband Radio Interface Board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.
Panel
Figure 5-37 shows the panel of the UBRI.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
134
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Figure 5-37 Panel of the UBRI
Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions: l l Provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI
LEDs
Table 5-51 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UBRI. Table 5-51 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI LED RUN Color Green State ON steady Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is in the alarm status. The board works properly. The board is loading software. The board is in the alarm status. No alarm is generated. The board works properly. The board is not working.
OFF steady
1s ON, 1s OFF 0.125s ON, 0.125s OFF ALM Red ON or blinking at a high frequency OFF steady ACT Green ON steady OFF steady
The UBRI provides six LEDs indicating the status of the CRRI links, which are above the SFP ports. Table 5-52 describes the CPRI link status LED.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
135
5 BBU3900 Equipment
Table 5-52 CPRI link status LED Label CPRIx Color Red/Green State ON (green) ON (red) Description The CPRI link is available. The optical module fails to receive signals. The RRU on the CPRI link is faulty. The CPRI link is out of lock.
0.125s ON, 0.125s OFF (Red) 1s ON, 1s OFF (red)
Ports
Table 5-53 describes the ports on the panel of the UBRI. Table 5-53 Ports on the panel of the UBRI Label CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP Port Quantity 6 Description Connecting the BBU and the RF module
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
136
6 Cable Connections of the DBS3900
Cable Connections of the DBS3900
About This Chapter

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900. 6.1 Power Cable Connections This section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets. 6.2 Transmission Cable Connections The transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900 and outdoor DBS3900. 6.3 CPRI Cable Connections The CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of the DBS3900. 6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
137
6.1 Power Cable Connections

This section describes the power cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
6.1.1 Power Cable Connections for the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)

The APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the power distribution unit (PDU), which converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into 48 V DC power to provides power to customer equipment. APM30 is short for advanced power module, and APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
NOTE
The DBS3900 is configured with the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario.
Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the input power is 110 V/220 V AC power, a distributed base station is configured with one APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one battery backup cabinet (BBC). The APM30 is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into 48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC. Figure 6-1 describes power cable connections. Figure 6-1 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30, one TMC, and one BBC
Table 6-1 lists the power cables.

Table 6-1 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30, one TMC, and one BBC SN P1 P2 and P5 P3 P4 P6 and P8 P7 Description Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet Power cable for the fan box 7.3 BBU Power Cable Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet Input Power Cable of the Heating Film Input Power Cable of the Heater
When a base station is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC, the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into 48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure 6-2 shows the power cable connections. Figure 6-2 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
139
Table 6-2 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC SN P1 P2 and P5 P3 P4 P6 and P8 P7 Description Input Power Cable of the APM30H Power Cabinet Power cable for the fan box BBU power cable Input Power Cable of the TMC11H Input power cables for the heating film in the battery cabinet Input power cable for the heater in the battery cabinet
When a base station is configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T, the APM30H (Ver.A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into 48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure 6-3 shows the power cable connections. Figure 6-3 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T

Table 6-3 Power cable connections for a base station with the configuration of one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T SN P1 P2 and P5 P3 P4 P6 and P7 Description Input Power Cables for the APM30H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H BBU power cable Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Power Cable Connections in the 48 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the input power is 48 V DC, a distributed base station is configured with two TMCs. The TMCs are configured with direct current distribution unit-03Bs (DCDU-03Bs), which provide power to the BBU and RRU or transmission equipment. Figure 6-4 describes power cable connections. Figure 6-4 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs
Table 6-4 lists the power cables. Table 6-4 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs SN P1 P2 P3 Description Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet Power cable for the fan box BBU power cable
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
141
When two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11Hs (Ver.A) provide power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission equipment. Figure 6-5 shows the power cable connections. Figure 6-5 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Table 6-5 lists the power cables. Table 6-5 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) SN P1 P2 P3 Description Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet Power cable for the fan box BBU power cable
6.1.2 Power Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
To meet the requirements of 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or 48 V DC power input, Huawei provides a series of power equipment in the APM30H (Ver.B) and the APM30H (Ver.C). APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler. The power equipment converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power to 48 V DC power and provides power to optional equipment.

In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D are configured. The APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the embedded power system (EPS), which converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power to 48 V DC power and supplies power to the baseband unit (BBU), remote radio unit (RRU), and TMC11H (Ver.B). TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler. IBBS200D is short for integrated battery backup system with direct cooler. Figure 6-6 shows the power cable connections.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
142
Figure 6-6 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-6 lists the power cables. Table 6-6 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 and P10 P2 and P11 P3 P4 and P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 Description Power cable for the junction box Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H BBU power cable Power Cables for the Storage Batteries Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power cable for the heating film
In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D are configured. The EPS in the APM30H (Ver.C) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power to 48 V DC power and supplies power to the BBU, RRUs, and TMC11H (Ver.C). Figure 6-7 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 6-7 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-7 lists the power cables. Table 6-7 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 and P9 P10 P11 Description Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H Input Power Cable for the Junction Box Power Cables for Storage Batteries Input Power Cable for the TMC11H External AC Input Power Cable RRU power cable BBU Power Cable Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
144
Figure 6-8 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit. Figure 6-8 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-8 lists the power cables. Table 6-8 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 and P9 P2 and P10 P3 P4 and P5 P6 P7 P8 Description Power cable for the junction box Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H BBU power cable Power Cables for the TEC Cooler Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Input Power Cable for the TMC11H
Figure 6-9 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200T.
Figure 6-9 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-9 lists the power cables. Table 6-9 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 and P8 P9 P10 Description Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H Input Power Cable for the Junction Box Power Cables for Storage Batteries External AC Input Power Cable RRU power cable BBU Power Cable Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
Figure 6-10 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds.
Figure 6-10 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-10 lists the power cables. Table 6-10 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 and P10 P2, P6, and P12 P3 P4 and P5 P7 P8 P9 P11 P13 and P14 Description Power cable for the junction box Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H BBU power cable Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Power cable for the heating film Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Figure 6-11 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds.
Figure 6-11 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-11 lists the power cables. Table 6-11 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 and P9 P10 P11 P12 and P13 Description Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H Input Power Cable for the Junction Box Power Cables for Storage Batteries Input Power Cable for the TMC11H External AC Input Power Cable RRU power cable BBU Power Cable Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H Power Cables for Storage Batteries
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
148
Figure 6-12 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts. Figure 6-12 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-12 lists the power cables. Table 6-12 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 and P9 P2, P6, and P11 P3 P4 and P5 P7 P8 P10 P12 and P13 Description Power cable for the junction box Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H BBU power cable Power Cables for the TEC Cooler Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
149
Figure 6-13 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts. Figure 6-13 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-13 lists the power cables. Table 6-13 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 and P8 P9 P10 Description Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H Input Power Cable for the Junction Box Power Cables for Storage Batteries External AC Input Power Cable RRU power cable BBU Power Cable Fan Power Cables in the IBBS200D Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
150
SN P11 and P12
Description Power Cables for Storage Batteries
In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are required. The power cable connections for the cabinets housing BBU0 and BBU1 are the same. Figure 6-14 and Figure 6-15 show the power cable connections in a triple-mode scenario when the BBU is configured in the APM30H (Ver.B). Figure 6-14 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario
Table 6-14 lists the power cables. Table 6-14 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario SN P1 and P10 P2 and P11 P3 P4 and P5 P6 P7
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Description Power cable for the junction box Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H BBU power cable Power Cables for the Storage Batteries Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable
SN P8 P9
Description Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power cable for the heating film
Figure 6-15 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario
P12 P11 P1 P9 P9 P10 P7 P1 P9 P3 P6 P10 P7 P2 P2
BBU0
BBU1
P3 P6
P4 P5
P4 P5
P13 P14
P13 P14
P8
P8
Table 6-15 lists the power cables. Table 6-15 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds in a triple-mode scenario SN P1 and P10 P2, P6, and P12 P3 P4 and P5 P7 P8 P9 P11 P13 and P14 Description Power cable for the junction box Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H BBU power cable Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Power cable for the heating film Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cables for the Storage Batteries
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
152
Power Cable Connections in the 48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) are configured. The DCDU-03B supplies power to the BBU, RRU, and other components. Figure 6-16 shows the power cable connections. Figure 6-16 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-16 lists the power cables. Table 6-16 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 Description Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H BBU power cable
In a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) are configured. The DCDU-11B supplies power to the BBU, RRU, or transmission devices. Figure 6-17 shows the power cable connections. Figure 6-17 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
153
Table 6-17 lists the power cables. Table 6-17 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 Description Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H BBU power cable
In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are required. The power cable connections for the cabinets housing BBU0 and BBU1 are the same. Figure 6-18 shows the power cable connections in a triple-mode scenario, taking the TMC11H (Ver.B) as an example. Figure 6-18 Power cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario
Table 6-18 lists the power cables. Table 6-18 Power cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 Description Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H BBU power cable
Power Cable Connections in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario, one +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) is configured. The power system (DC/DC) converts the +24 V DC power to 48 V DC power and supplies the power to the DCDU-03B, which supplies power to the BBU, RRUs, and other devices in the cabinet. Figure 6-19 shows the power cable connections.
Figure 6-19 Power cable connections for one APM30H (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-19 lists the power cables. Table 6-19 Power cables for one +24 V DC APM30H (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 Description Input power cable for the power system (DC/ DC) Input power cable for the DCDU-03B BBU power cable
In a triple-mode scenario, two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) are configured. Figure 6-20 shows the power cable connections. Figure 6-20 Power cable connections for two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
155
Table 6-20 Power cables for two +24 V DC APM30Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario SN P1 P2 P3 Description Input power cable for the power system (DC/ DC) Input power cable for the DCDU-03B BBU power cable
6.1.3 Power Cable Connections of the OMB, IMB03, and IFS06

To meet the requirements of 110 V AC, 220 V AC, 48 V DC, or +24 V DC power input, the outdoor mini box (OMB) and the indoor mini box (IMB03) are configured with a power system (AC/DC or DC/DC) to convert 110 V AC, 220 V AC, or +24 V DC power to 48 V DC power and then supply power to customer equipment.
NOTE
l For power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an IMB03 or with an IMB03 and an indoor floor installation support (IFS06) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, +24 V DC, or 48 V DC power supply scenarios, see the DBS3900 Installation Guide and the DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide. l If a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB or an IMB03, the DBS3900 can be configured as a singlemode or dual-mode base station. If a DBS3900 is configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06, the DBS3900 can be configured as a triple-mode base station.

Figure 6-21 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 6-21 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
156
Table 6-21 lists the power cables. Table 6-21 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario SN P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 Description Power cable for the inner air circulation fan Power cable for the heat exchange unit type A (HEUA) Baseband unit (BBU) power cable Input power cable for the DC power distribution box Power cable for the outer air circulation fan Input power cable for the power system (AC/ DC) AC input power cable for the OMB
Power Cable Connections in the 48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 6-22 shows the power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in DC power supply scenario. Figure 6-22 Power cable connections of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in DC power supply scenario

Table 6-22 Power cables of a DBS3900 configured with an OMB in 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario SN P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 Description Power cable for the inner air circulation fan Power cable for the HEUA Power cable for the outer air circulation fan BBU power cable DC input power cable for the OMB
6.2 Transmission Cable Connections

The transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900 and outdoor DBS3900.
6.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base Station
In a GSM only base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1 Cable

Figure 6-23 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmission board in the BBU3900. Figure 6-23 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-23 describes the cable connections. Table 6-23 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
158
Figure 6-24 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured as transmission boards in the BBU3900. Figure 6-24 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-24 describes the cable connections. Table 6-24 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Transmission over the FE Cable

Figure 6-25 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission. Figure 6-25 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Table 6-25 describes the cable connections. Table 6-25 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
159
Figure 6-26 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission. Figure 6-26 FE/GE optical cable connections
Table 6-26 describes the cable connections. Table 6-26 FE/GE optical cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base Station
In a GSM base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Figure 6-27 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmission board in the BBU3900. Figure 6-27 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-27 describes the cable connections. Table 6-27 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
160
Figure 6-28 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured as transmission boards in the BBU3900. Figure 6-28 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-28 describes the cable connections. Table 6-28 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 6-29 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission. Figure 6-29 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Table 6-29 describes the cable connections. Table 6-29 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-30 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission. Figure 6-30 FE/GE optical cable connections
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
161
6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Figure 6-31 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-31 E1/T1 cable connections (1)
Table 6-31 describes the cable connections. Table 6-31 E1/T1 cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-32 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and UTRP3 (or UTRP4) are configured as the main control board in the BBU. Figure 6-32 E1/T1 cable connections (2)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
162
Table 6-32 describes the cable connections. Table 6-32 E1/T1 cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-33 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-33 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)
Table 6-33 describes the cable connections. Table 6-33 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-34 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP9 are configured in the BBU. Figure 6-34 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
163
Table 6-34 describes the cable connections. Table 6-34 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-35 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-35 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)
Table 6-35 describes the cable connections. Table 6-35 FE/GE optical cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-36 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP2 are configured in the BBU. Figure 6-36 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)
Table 6-36 describes the cable connections. Table 6-36 FE/GE optical cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
164
6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Figure 6-37 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-37 E1/T1 cable connections (1)
Table 6-37 describes the cable connections. Table 6-37 E1/T1 cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-38 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP3/UTRP4 is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-38 E1/T1 cable connections (2)
Table 6-38 describes the cable connections. Table 6-38 E1/T1 cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
165

Figure 6-39 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-39 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)
Table 6-39 describes the cable connections. Table 6-39 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-40 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP9 is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-40 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)
Table 6-40 describes the cable connections. Table 6-40 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-41 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-41 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
166
Table 6-41 describes the cable connections. Table 6-41 FE/GE optical cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-42 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP2 is configured in the BBU. Figure 6-42 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)
Table 6-42 describes the cable connections. Table 6-42 FE/GE optical cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station
In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1/T1 Cable

When the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 6-43 shows the transmission cable connections. Figure 6-43 E1/T1 cable connections
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
167
Table 6-43 describes the cable connections. Table 6-43 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Transmission over the FE/GE Cable

When an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usually used for data transmission. Figure 6-44 shows the transmission cable connections. Figure 6-44 FE/GE optical cable connections
Table 6-45 describes the cable connections.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
168
Table 6-45 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
6.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station
In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1/T1 Cable

When the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 6-46 shows the transmission cable connections. Figure 6-46 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 6-46 describes the cable connections. Table 6-46 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Transmission over the FE/GE Cable

When an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usually used for data transmission. Figure 6-47 shows the transmission cable connections. Figure 6-47 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 6-47 FE/GE optical cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Table 6-48 describes the cable connections. Table 6-48 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
6.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IP co-transmission can be used. Based on the IP co-transmission, the GSM+UMTS base station can implement route backup. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.
TDM Common Transmission

Figure 6-49 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GTMU serves as the shared port to connect to the BSC and RNC. The GTMU communicates with the WMPT using the backplane to implement TDM common transmission. Figure 6-49 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
170
Table 6-49 describes the cables. Table 6-49 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-50 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GSM UTRP serves as the shared port to connect to the BSC and RNC. The GSM UTRP communicates with the WMPT using the backplane to implement TDM common transmission.
NOTE
Note that the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and the WMPT can also be used for data transmission independently, but the corresponding cable connections are not shown here.
Figure 6-50 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-50 describes the cables. Table 6-50 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (2) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
IP Over E1 Common Transmission

Figure 6-51 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP common transmission mode when the E1/F1 port on the UMTS UTRP serves as the shared port to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE electrical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP common transmission.

NOTE
IP common transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT. The transmission cable connections are similar to Figure 6-51, which are not described here.
Figure 6-51 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-51 describes the cables. Table 6-51 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-52 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission.
NOTE
Table 6-52 describes the cables.

Table 6-52 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2) SN T1 T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
IP Over FE Common Transmission

Figure 6-53 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared ports for data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 6-53 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-53 describes the cables. Table 6-53 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-54 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 6-54 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmission mode (2)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
173
Figure 6-55 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP common transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT serves as the shared port to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP common transmission. Figure 6-55 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmission mode (3)
Table 6-55 describes the cables. Table 6-55 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmission mode (3) SN T1 T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports. For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has the following characteristics: l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC and RNC respectively using the active channel.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
l l l
The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected using FE ports on their panels. If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is restored, the route is switched back to the active one. The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of the GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has the following limitations: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 common transmission. The route backup mode is not applicable to the ports on the UTRPs for GSM or UMTS transmission. It is applicable only to the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels. In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSC and the RNC.
Figure 6-56 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC. Figure 6-56 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the base station controller
Table 6-56 describes the cables. Table 6-56 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the base station controller SN T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Description For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
Figure 6-57 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and WMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC.
Figure 6-57 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the base station controller
Table 6-57 describes the cables. Table 6-57 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the base station controller SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
6.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IP co-transmission can be used. Based on the IP co-transmission, the GSM+UMTS base station can implement route backup. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.
TDM Common Transmission

Figure 6-58 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GTMU serves as the shared port to connect to the BSC and RNC. The GTMU communicates with the WMPT using the backplane to implement TDM common transmission. Figure 6-58 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-58 describes the cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
176
Table 6-58 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (1) SN T1 Description For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-59 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GSM UTRP serves as the shared port to connect to the BSC and RNC. The GSM UTRP communicates with the WMPT using the backplane to implement TDM common transmission.
NOTE
Note that the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and the WMPT can also be used for data transmission independently, but the corresponding cable connections are not shown here.
Figure 6-59 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-59 describes the cable. Table 6-59 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (2) SN T1 Description For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 6-60 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP common transmission mode when the E1/F1 port on the UMTS UTRP serves as the shared port to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE electrical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP common transmission.
NOTE
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
177
Table 6-60 describes the cables. Table 6-60 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Figure 6-61 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP common transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT serves as the shared port to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP common transmission. Figure 6-61 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-61 describes the cables. Table 6-61 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
IP Over FE Common Transmission

Figure 6-62 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared ports for data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 6-62 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmission mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
178
Figure 6-63 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 6-63 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmission mode (2)

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has the following characteristics: l l l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC and RNC respectively using the active channel. The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected using FE ports on their panels. If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is restored, the route is switched back to the active one.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of the GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has the following limitations: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 common transmission. The route backup mode is not applicable to the ports on the UTRPs for GSM or UMTS transmission. It is applicable only to the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels. In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSC and the RNC.
Figure 6-64 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC. Figure 6-64 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the BSC and RNC
Table 6-64 describes the cables. Table 6-64 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the BSC and RNC SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
Figure 6-65 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and WMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC. Figure 6-65 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the BSC and RNC
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
180
Table 6-65 describes the cables. Table 6-65 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the BSC and RNC SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
6.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmission links can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1

Figure 6-66 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 6-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode
Table 6-66 describes the cable connections. Table 6-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
181
GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE

Figure 6-67 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 6-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-67 describes the cable connections. Table 6-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-68 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 6-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-68 describes the cable connections. Table 6-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
182
6.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmission links can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1

Figure 6-69 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 6-69 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode
Table 6-69 describes the cable connections. Table 6-69 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE

Figure 6-70 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 6-70 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)
Table 6-70 describes the cable connections. Table 6-70 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
183
Figure 6-71 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 6-71 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)
Table 6-71 describes the cable connections. Table 6-71 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.
IP over E1 Common Transmission

Figure 6-72 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. Figure 6-72 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
184
Table 6-72 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1) SN T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Description For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Figure 6-73 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Figure 6-73 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-73 describes the cables. Table 6-73 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2) SN T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Description For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
IP over FE/GE Common Transmission

Figure 6-74 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
185
Figure 6-74 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-74 describes the cables. Table 6-74 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-75 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Figure 6-75 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-75 describes the cables. Table 6-75 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (2) SN T1 T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports. For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
186

In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l l l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the transmission equipment respectively using the active channel. The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels. If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is restored, the route is switched back to the active one. The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 common transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels. In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment.
Figure 6-76 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment. Figure 6-76 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transmission equipment
Table 6-76 describes the cables. Table 6-76 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transmission equipment SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Figure 6-77 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT
are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment. Figure 6-77 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transmission equipment
Table 6-77 describes the cables. Table 6-77 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transmission equipment SN T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Description For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
6.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

Figure 6-78 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Figure 6-78 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
188
Table 6-78 describes the cables. Table 6-78 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1) SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
Figure 6-79 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. Figure 6-79 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-79 describes the cables. Table 6-79 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2) SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
IP Over FE/GE Common Transmission

Figure 6-80 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. Figure 6-80 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
189
Table 6-80 describes the cables. Table 6-80 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-81 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Figure 6-81 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode
Table 6-81 describes the cables. Table 6-81 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and LMPT are connected to the transport network through the primary channel. The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels. If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
190
The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels. In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the transport network.
Figure 6-82 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the base station controller. Figure 6-82 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the base station controller
Table 6-82 describes the cables. Table 6-82 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the base station controller SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the BSC and RNC
Figure 6-83 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the base station controller. Figure 6-83 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the base station controller
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
191
Table 6-83 describes the cables. Table 6-83 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the base station controller SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE

Figure 6-84 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-84 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-84 describes the cable connections. Table 6-84 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Cable Number T4
Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-85 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-85 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-85 describes the cable connections. Table 6-85 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-86 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-86 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 6-86 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 T6 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-87 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-87 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-87 describes the cable connections. Table 6-87 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE

Figure 6-88 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separate transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both the GSM and LTE sides.
Figure 6-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-88 describes the cable connections. Table 6-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-89 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-89 describes the cable connections. Table 6-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
195
6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE

Figure 6-90 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-90 describes the cable connections. Table 6-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-91 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
196
Table 6-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-92 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-92 describes the cable connections. Table 6-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-93 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
197
Table 6-93 describes the cable connections. Table 6-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE

Figure 6-94 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separate transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both the GSM and LTE sides. Figure 6-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-94 describes the cable connections. Table 6-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-95 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 6-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.15 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup and hybrid transmission can be implemented.

Figure 6-96 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT. Figure 6-96 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-96 describes the cables. Table 6-96 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1) SN T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Description For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
199
Figure 6-97 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT. Figure 6-97 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-97 describes the cables. Table 6-97 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2) SN T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Description For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Figure 6-98 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT. Figure 6-98 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
200
Table 6-98 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-99 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT. Figure 6-99 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (2)
Table 6-99 describes the cables. Table 6-99 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (2) SN T1 T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports. For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable.

In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type (either optical or electrical ports) on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected, and the FE ports of the other type (either optical or electrical ports) on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment. In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the transmission equipment respectively using the active channel. The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
l l
If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel is restored, the route is switched back to the active one. The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the UMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 common transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment.
Figure 6-100 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment. Figure 6-100 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission (1)
Table 6-100 describes the cables. Table 6-100 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission (1) SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Figure 6-101 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
202
Figure 6-101 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission (2)
Table 6-101 describes the cables. Table 6-101 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission (2) SN T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Description For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
Hybrid Transmission
In hybrid transmission mode, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port serve as shared ports to connect to the transmission equipment. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services with high QoS requirements, such as CS services; and the FE/GE port is used to transmit the services with low QoS requirements, such as PS services. The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTE base station in hybrid transmission mode. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable. Figure 6-102 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port). Figure 6-102 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (1)

Table 6-102 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 T3 T4 Description For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-103 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port). Figure 6-103 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (2)
Table 6-103 describes the cables. Table 6-103 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (2) SN T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Description For details, see 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
204
6.2.16 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup and hybrid transmission can be implemented.

Figure 6-104 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT. Figure 6-104 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-104 describes the cables. Table 6-104 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1) SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
Figure 6-105 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT. Figure 6-105 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2)

Table 6-105 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2) SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

Figure 6-106 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT. Figure 6-106 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1)
Table 6-106 describes the cables. Table 6-106 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-107 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/ GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT. Figure 6-107 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode

Table 6-107 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode SN T1 T2 Description For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type (either optical or electrical ports) on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected, and the FE ports of the other type (either optical or electrical ports) on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment. In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l l l IP transmission is applied. The WMPT and LMPT are connected to the transport network through the primary channel. The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels. If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one. The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the UMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the transport network.
Figure 6-108 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment. Figure 6-108 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
207
Table 6-108 describes the cables. Table 6-108 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission (1) SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Figure 6-109 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment. Figure 6-109 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission (2)
Table 6-109 describes the cables. Table 6-109 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission (2) SN T1 and T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
Hybrid Transmission
In hybrid transmission mode, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port serve as shared ports to connect to the transmission equipment. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services with high QoS requirements, such as CS services; and the FE/GE port is used to transmit the services with low QoS requirements, such as PS services. The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTE base station in hybrid transmission mode. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.
Figure 6-110 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port). Figure 6-110 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (1)
Table 6-110 describes the cables. Table 6-110 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (1) SN T1 T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Figure 6-111 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port). Figure 6-111 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (2)
Table 6-111 describes the cables. Table 6-111 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (2) SN T1 T2 T3 Description For details, see 7.8 FE/GE Cable. For details, see 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. For details, see 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
209
6.2.17 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE

Figure 6-112 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-112 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-112 describes the cable connections. Table 6-112 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 T4 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-113 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-113 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
210
Table 6-113 describes the cable connections. Table 6-113 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 6-114 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-114 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-114 describes the cable connections. Table 6-114 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 T6 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-115 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 6-115 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-115 describes the cable connections. Table 6-115 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE

Figure 6-116 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in separate transmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the UMTS and LTE sides. Figure 6-116 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Table 6-116 describes the cable connections. Table 6-116 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
212
Figure 6-117 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-117 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-117 describes the cable connections. Table 6-117 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
6.2.18 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE

Figure 6-118 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-118 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
213
Table 6-118 describes the cable connections. Table 6-118 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-119 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-119 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-119 describes the cable connections. Table 6-119 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 6-120 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-120 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
214
Table 6-120 describes the cable connections. Table 6-120 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-121 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-121 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-121 describes the cable connections. Table 6-121 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 7.6 E1/T1 Cable. See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable.
UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE

Figure 6-122 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in separate transmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the UMTS and LTE sides. Figure 6-122 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
215
Table 6-122 describes the cable connections. Table 6-122 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 6-123 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 6-123 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)
Table 6-123 describes the cable connections. Table 6-123 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 7.8 FE/GE Cable.
6.2.19 Transmission Cable Connections for a Triple-Mode Base Station

The triple-mode base station solution is provided by Huawei in SingleRAN6.0, which is applicable to three scenarios: GU+LO, GL+UO, and UO+GL. This section describes the transmission cable connections for the triple-mode base stations in three scenarios. In SingleRAN6.0, a single BBU can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs are required for a triple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding. l l In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction, and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion. In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL +UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
GU (BBU0)+LO (BBU1)
In the GU+LO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. The common transmission mode, separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission are supported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in CoTransmission Mode, 6.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode. In the GU+LO scenario, BBU1 works in LTE Only mode. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station and 6.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station.
GL (BBU0)+UO (BBU1)
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. The common transmission mode, separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission are supported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in CoTransmission Mode, 6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode. In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS Only mode. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station and 6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station.
UO (BBU0)+GL (BBU1)
In the UO+GL scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS Only mode. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station and 6.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station. In the UO+GL scenario, BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode. The common transmission mode, separate transmission mode, and route backup mode with IP common transmission are supported. For details about the transmission cable connections, see 6.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode, 6.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in CoTransmission Mode, 6.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode, and 6.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
217
6.3 CPRI Cable Connections

The CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of the DBS3900.
6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. Figure 6-124 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb, the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, and the MIMO is supported. Figure 6-124 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 6-125 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb, the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMO is supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sector are cascaded. Figure 6-125 CPRI cable connections (2)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
218
Figure 6-126 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPd, the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMO is supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sector are cascaded. Figure 6-126 CPRI cable connections (3)
6.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, six RRUs correspond to three sectors. In this case, a pair of two RRUs working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded. Figure 6-127 shows the CPRI cable connections. Figure 6-127 CPRI cable connections (1)
When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, nine RRUs correspond to three sectors. In this case, a group of three RRUs working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded. Figure 6-128 shows the CPRI cable connections.
Figure 6-128 CPRI cable connections (2)
6.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. Figure 6-129 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band mode and three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors. Figure 6-129 CPRI cable connections (1)
When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, an RRU3804 working in star topology corresponds to a sector, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-130.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
220
When the RRU3804 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3804s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-131. Figure 6-131 CPRI cable connections (3)
When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in single-band mode, and three RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star topology correspond to three sectors, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-132.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
221
6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band.
NOTE
The CPRI ports on the LBBP are connected to the RRUs from CPRI0 in sequence, and none of the ports is skipped.
When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-133. Figure 6-133 CPRI cable connections (1)
Figure 6-134 shows the CPRI cable connections of the two combined RRUs serving not more than three cells. The RRUs work in single-band 4T4R MIMO mode, providing 10 MHz bandwidth.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
222
Figure 6-135 shows the CPRI cable connections of the two combined RRUs serving not more than three cells. The RRUs work in single-band 4T4R MIMO mode, providing 20 MHz bandwidth. . Figure 6-135 CPRI cable connections (3)
6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology correspond to one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-136.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
223
When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-137. Figure 6-137 CPRI cable connections (2)
When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth, supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs in a sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-138. Figure 6-138 CPRI cable connections (3)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
224
When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and the RRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008 works in single-band mode, three RRU3008s working in star topology serve three sectors. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-139. Figure 6-139 CPRI cable connections (4)
6.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station

When the DBS3900 works in UL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors and does not support MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-140. Figure 6-140 CPRI cable connections (1)
When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, a pair of RRUs working in the same sector are connected in
cascading mode, and the star topology is used. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-141. Figure 6-141 CPRI cable connections (2)
When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth, supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it working in star topology corresponds to three sectors, and the RRUs working in the same sector are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 6-142. Figure 6-142 CPRI cable connections (3)
6.3.7 CPRI Cable Connections in the Triple-Mode Base Station

The triple-mode base station solution is provided by Huawei in SingleRAN6.0, which is applicable to three scenarios: GU+LO, GL+UO, and UO+GL. This section describes the CPRI cable connections for the triple-mode base stations in three scenarios. In SingleRAN6.0, a single BBU can support a maximum of two modes, and two BBUs are required for a triple-mode base station. In this document, the two BBUs are described as BBU0 and BBU1 for better understanding.
l l l
In an expanded base station, BBU0 is the BBU installed during the initial site construction, and BBU1 is the BBU installed during the capacity expansion. In a new base station, BBU0 is the BBU working in GSM+UMTS or GSM+LTE mode, and BBU1 is the BBU working in LTE Only or UMTS Only mode. The difference between the GL+UO scenario and UO+GL scenario is as follows: the GL +UO scenario is applicable to both an expanded base station and a new base station, while the UO+GL scenario is applicable only to an expanded base station.
GU (BBU0)+LO (BBU1)
In the GU+LO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+UMTS mode. 6.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables. In the GU+LO scenario, BBU1 works in LTE Only mode. 6.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
GL (BBU0)+UO (BBU1)
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in GSM+LTE mode. 6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables. In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in UMTS Only mode. 6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
UO (BBU0)+GL (BBU1)
In the GL+UO scenario, BBU0 works in UMTS Only mode. 6.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables. In the GL+UO scenario, BBU1 works in GSM+LTE mode. 6.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station shows the connections of the CPRI cables.
6.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections

This section describes the monitoring signal cable connections for the DBS3900 cabinets.
6.4.1 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections of the APM30 or APM30H (Ver.A)

The monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 are different in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and 48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario
NOTE
If a DBS3900 is configured with an advanced power module (APM30) or APM30H (Ver.A), the DBS3900 can work only in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario. APM30H is short for advanced power module with a heat-exchanger cooler.
Figure 6-143 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30, one transmission cabinet (TMC), and one backup battery cabinet (BBC) in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario.
Figure 6-143 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30, one TMC, and one BBC
Table 6-124 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-124 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30, one TMC, and one BBC SN S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30 Transmission Cabinet
Figure 6-144 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC. TMC11H is short for transmission cabinet with heat-exchanger cooler.
Figure 6-144 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC
Table 6-125 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-125 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one BBC SN S1 S2 S3 and S7 S4 S5 and S6 Description Environment monitoring signal cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
Figure 6-145 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T). TEC is short for thermoelectric cooling unit.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
229
Figure 6-145 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T
Table 6-126 shows the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-126 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and one IBBS200T SN S1 S2 S3 and S7 S4 S5 and S6 Description Environment monitoring signal cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
Figure 6-146 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
230
Figure 6-146 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs
Table 6-127 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-127 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two BBCs SN S1 S2 S3 and S7 S4 S5 and S6 Description Environment monitoring signal cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
Figure 6-147 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
231
Figure 6-147 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts
Table 6-128 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-128 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.A), one TMC11H (Ver.A), and two IBBS200Ts SN S1 S2 S3 and S7 S4 S5 and S6 Description Environment monitoring signal cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 6-148 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMCs in a 48 V DC power supply scenario.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
232
Figure 6-148 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMCs
Table 6-129 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-129 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two TMCs SN S1 and S2 Description 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU
Figure 6-149 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A). Figure 6-149 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A)
Table 6-130 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-130 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.A) SN S1 and S2 Description 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
233
6.4.2 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)
The monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 are different in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and 48 V DC power supply scenarios.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario
Figure 6-150 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario. Figure 6-150 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dualmode scenario
Table 6-131 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-131 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN S1 S2 and S4 Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
234
SN S3 and S5
Description 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
Figure 6-151 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T. Figure 6-151 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dualmode scenario
Table 6-132 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-132 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and one IBBS200D or IBBS200T in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE and the BBU
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
235
Figure 6-152 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts. Figure 6-152 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dualmode scenario
Table 6-133 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-133 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 S6 Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
Figure 6-153 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
236
Figure 6-153 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dualmode scenario
Table 6-134 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-134 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with one APM30H (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 S6 Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
Figure 6-154 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
237
Figure 6-154 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a singlemode or dual-mode scenario
S1 S1 S2 S3 S1 S1 S2 S6
S5
S6 S4
S6 S4
Table 6-135 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-135 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 S6 Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
Figure 6-155 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
238
Figure 6-155 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a singlemode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-136 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-136 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.C), one TMC11H (Ver.C), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 S6 Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs
In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. BBU0 is configured in the basic cabinet and BBU1 is configured in the extension cabinet. All the monitoring equipment is connected to BBU0 instead of BBU1. The monitoring schemes are the same as in a dual-mode scenario. Figure 6-156 shows the monitoring scheme in a triple-mode scenario taking the APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
239
Figure 6-156 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a triple-mode scenario
Table 6-137 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-137 Monitoring signal cables for a DBS3900 configured with two APM30Hs (Ver.B), one TMC11H (Ver.B), and four IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts in a triple-mode scenario SN S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 S6 Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs

Figure 6-157 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario. Figure 6-157 Monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.B)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
240
Table 6-138 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-138 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN S1 and S2 Description 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
Figure 6-158 shows the monitoring signal cable connections for a DBS3900 configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver.C). Figure 6-158 Monitoring signal cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario
Table 6-139 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-139 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.C) in a single-mode or dual-mode scenario SN S1 and S2 Description Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUE and the BBU
In a triple-mode scenario, two BBUs are configured. BBU0 is configured in the basic TMC and BBU1 is configured in the extension TMC. All the monitoring equipment is connected to BBU0 instead of BBU1. The monitoring schemes are the same as in a dual-mode scenario. Figure 6-159 shows the monitoring scheme in a triple-mode scenario taking the TMC11H (Ver.B) as an example.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
241
Figure 6-159 Monitoring signal cable connections for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario
Table 6-140 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-140 Monitoring signal cables for two TMC11Hs (Ver.B) in a triple-mode scenario SN S1 and S2 Description 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
6.4.3 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections for the OMB/IMB03/ IFS06

The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V AC/220 V AC, 48 V DC, and +24 V DC power supply scenarios.
NOTE
l The monitoring signal cable connections for the IMB03 or IMB03+IFS06 that is configured for the DBS3900 are described in the DBS3900 (Ver.B) Installation Guide and DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide. IMB is short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor installation support. l In the single-mode or dual-mode scenario, the DBS3900 is configured with the outdoor mini box (OMB) or IMB03. The DBS3900 is configured with the IMB03+IFS06 in the single-mode, dual-mode scenario, or triple-mode scenario.
Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario
Figure 6-160 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured with an AC OMB.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
242
Figure 6-160 Connections of the monitoring signal cables for the AC OMB
S2 S2 S1 S4 S1 S2 S3 S5 S5 S3
S4
S2
Table 6-141 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-141 Monitoring signal cables for the AC OMB SN S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Description Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC Surge Protection Box Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DC Power Equipment

Figure 6-161 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured with a DC OMB.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
243
Figure 6-161 Connections of the DC OMB monitoring signal cables
Table 6-142 lists the monitoring signal cables. Table 6-142 Monitoring signal cables for the DC OMB SN S1 S2 S3 Description Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
244
7 BBU3900 Cables
7
About This Chapter
BBU3900 Cables
This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, and installation positions. 7.1 List of BBU3900 Cables This chapter describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBU power cable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surge protection transfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnection cable between FE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU, monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), BBU alarm cable, and GPS clock signal cable. 7.2 PGND Cable The PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU. 7.3 BBU Power Cable This section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cable can be used, depending on the power supply scenario. 7.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB) The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA. The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA. 7.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C) A BBU power cable feeds power into a BBU. 7.6 E1/T1 Cable The E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits baseband signals. 7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the transmission board. This cable is optional. 7.8 FE/GE Cable The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices and transmits baseband signals.
7 BBU3900 Cables
7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable The FE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main control board to the UFLP. 7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports The cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP transmission. 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports The cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP transmission. 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable The FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission device. This cable is optional. 7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals. 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU This describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits the environment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU. 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU The monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoring information collected by the HEUA to the BBU. 7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU. 7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable This section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals from the EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA. 7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power fault alarms on the PSU. 7.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position status of the PSU. 7.20 BBU Alarm Cable The BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU. 7.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable The GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
246
7 BBU3900 Cables
7.1 List of BBU3900 Cables

This chapter describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBU power cable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surge protection transfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnection cable between FE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU, monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), BBU alarm cable, and GPS clock signal cable. Table 7-1 describes the List of BBU3900 Cables. Table 7-1 List of BBU3900 Cables Cable One End Connector 7.2 PGND Cable 7.3 BBU Power Cable OT terminal (6mm2, M4) 3V3 connector 3V3 connector Installation Position BBU/ Grounding bolt BBU/UPEU/ PWR BBU/UPEU/ PWR The Other End Connector OT terminal (6mm2, M8) OT terminal (6mm2, M4) Easy Power Receptacle (Pressfit Type) Connector The connector needs to be made on site according to the field requirements. DB25 connector Installation Position Nearest grounding bar DCDU/LOAD6 EPS/LOAD1
7.6 E1/T1 Cable
DB26 connector
E1/T1 port on the GTMU or UELP or WMPT or UTRP in the BBU E1/T1 port on the GTMU or WMPT or UTRP in the BBU BBU/UFLP/ FE0 port at the OUTSIDE side BBU/GTMU or WMPT/FE0 FE/GE port on the UTRP in the BBU
Port on the transmission device
7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable 7.8 FE/GE Cable
DB26 connector
BBU/UELP/ INSIDE
RJ-45 connector
RJ-45 connector
Port on the transmission device
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
247
7 BBU3900 Cables
Cable
One End Connector Installation Position BBU/GTMU or WMPT/FE0 FE/GE port on the UTRP in the BBU FE/GE port on the LMPT in the BBU
The Other End Connector RJ-45 connector Installation Position BBU/UFLP/FE0 port at the INSIDE side
7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable
RJ-45 connector
7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports 7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports 7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable 7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable 7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU 7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU
RJ-45 connector
BBU/WMPT/ FE0
RJ-45 connector
BBU/GTMU/ FE0
LC connector
BBU/WMPT/ FE1
LC connector
BBU/GTMU/ FE1
LC connector
BBU/WMPT or GTMU/FE1 BBU/GTMU or WBBP/CPRI BBU/UPEU or UEIU/MON1
FC/SC/LC connector DLC connector
Port on the transmission device RRU/CPRI_W
DLC connector
RJ-45 connector
Twisted pair
APMI/TX+, TX-, RX+, RX-
RJ-45 connector
BBU/UPEU or UEIU/MON
RJ-45 connector
HEUA/COM_IN
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
248
7 BBU3900 Cables
Cable
One End Connector Installation Position BBU/UPEU or UEIU/MON1
The Other End Connector RJ-45 connector Installation Position CMUA/ COM_IN
7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU 7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable 7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) 7.19 InPosition Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) 7.20 BBU Alarm Cable 7.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable
RJ-45 connector
RJ-45 connector
BBU/UPEU/ MON1
DB9 male connector
EMUA/RS-485 port
RJ-45 connector
BBU/UPEU or UEIU/ EXT_ALM0
Cord end terminal
PSU(DC/DC)/ ALM
RJ-45 connector
BBU/UPEU or UEIU/ EXT_ALM1
RJ-45 connector
PSU(DC/DC)/ PRESENT
RJ-45 connector
BBU/UPEU or UEIU/ EXT_ALM BBU/WMPT or USCU/GPS
RJ-45 connector
Port on the external monitoring device GPS surge protector
SMA male connector
N-type female connector
7.2 PGND Cable

The PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU.
Structure
The green and yellow PGND cable is a single cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2. Both ends of the cable are OT terminals. If you prepare the cable by yourself, it is recommended that you use a copper-based cable with a minimum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2. Figure 7-1 shows the PGND cable.
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-1 PGND cable
(1) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)
7.3 BBU Power Cable

This section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cable can be used, depending on the power supply scenario.
Exterior
The BBU power cable depends on the type of the cabinet containing the BBU, because different types of cabinet use different power supplies. When the power supply device is the DCDU or PDU, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector at one end and bare wires at the other end. Based on the connector of the power distribution device, appropriate terminals are added to the bare wire end on site. Figure 7-2 shows the BBU power cable with OT terminals at the bare wire end as an example. Figure 7-2 BBU power cable (1)
(1) 3V3 connector
(2) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)
NOTE
There are two wires in the -48 V power cable with a blue wire and a black wire. The +24 V power cable and the -48 V power cable have the same exterior, but they differ in color. The +24 V power cable has a red wire and a black wire.
When the power supply device is the EPS, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector at one end and an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at the other end. Figure 7-3 shows the BBU power cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
250
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-3 BBU power cable (2)
(1) Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector
(2) 3V3 power connector
Pin Assignment
The power cable is a 2-wire cable. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable. Table 7-2 Pin assignment for the wires of the -48 V power cable Pin on the 3V3 Connector A1 A2 A3 Color Blue Black Description -48 V GND
Table 7-3 Pin assignment for the wires of the +24 V power cable Pin on the 3V3 Connector A1 A2 A3 Color Red Black Description +24 V GND
7.4 BBU Power Cable (OMB)

The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA. The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA.
Appearance
Figure 7-4 shows the appearance of power cable (AC OMB).
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
251
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-4 Appearance of power cable (AC OMB)
(1) 3V3 power connector for the BBU
(2) H4 connector
(3) 3V3 power connector for the HEUA
Figure 7-5 shows the appearance of power cable (DC OMB). Figure 7-5 Appearance of power cable (DC OMB)
(2) OT terminal
7.5 BBU Power Cable (Ver.C)

A BBU power cable feeds power into a BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-6 shows a BBU power cable. The cable has a 3V3 power connector at one end and an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at the other end.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
252
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-6 BBU power cable
(1) Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector
Pin Assignment
The BBU power cable consists of two wires. Table 7-4 lists the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU power cable. Table 7-4 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU power cable Wire W1 W2 X1 End X1.A1 X1.A3 X2 End X2.2 X2.1 Wire Color in Most Area Blue Black Wire Color in Other Area Gray Blue
7.6 E1/T1 Cable

The E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits baseband signals.
Exterior
The E1/T1 cables are classified into two types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable and 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable. One end of the E1/T1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable should be made on site according to site requirements. Figure 7-7 shows an E1/T1 cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
253
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-7 E1/T1 cable
(1) DB26 male connector
Table 7-5 describes the connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable. Table 7-5 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable Cable 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable One End DB26 male connector The other End L9 male connector L9 female connector SMB female connector BNC male connector SMZ male connector SMZ female connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-6 and Table 7-7 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 cable.
NOTE
In Table 7-6, "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable, and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.
Table 7-6 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable Pins of the DB26 Male Connector X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Wire Type Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip
Coaxial Series No. 1
Cable Label RX1+ RX1-
RX2+ RX2-
RX3+
254
7 BBU3900 Cables
Pins of the DB26 Male Connector X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X1.19 X1.20 X1.21 X1.22 X1.23 X1.24 X1.25 X1.26
Wire Type Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
Coaxial Series No.
Cable Label RX3-
RX4+ RX4-
TX1+ TX1-
TX2+ TX2-
TX3+ TX3-
TX4+ TX4-
Table 7-7 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable Pins of the DB26 Male Connector X.1 X.2 X.3 X.4 X.5 X.6 X.7 X.8 X.19 X.20 X.21 X.22 X.23 X.24 Wire Color Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Gray White Blue Red Orange Red Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Cable Labels RX1+ RX1RX2+ RX2RX3+ RX3RX4+ RX4TX1+ TX1TX2+ TX2TX3+ TX3-
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
255
7 BBU3900 Cables
Pins of the DB26 Male Connector X.25 X.26
Wire Color Green Red
Wire Type Twisted pair
Cable Labels TX4+ TX4-
7.7 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable

This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the transmission board. This cable is optional.
Exterior
The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25 male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-8. Figure 7-8 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-8 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable. Table 7-8 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X1.20 X1.19 X1.4 X1.3 X1.22 X1.21
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Type Twisted pair cable
Pin on the DB25 Male Connector X2.2 X2.3
Twisted pair cable
X2.4 X2.5
Twisted pair cable
X2.6 X2.7
256
7 BBU3900 Cables
Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X1.6 X1.5 X1.24 X1.23 X1.8 X1.7 X1.1 X1.2 X1.25 X1.26
Type Twisted pair cable
Pin on the DB25 Male Connector X2.8 X2.9
Twisted pair cable
X2.10 X2.11
Twisted pair cable
X2.12 X2.13
Twisted pair cable
X2.14 X2.15
Twisted pair cable
X2.24 X2.25
7.8 FE/GE Cable

The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices and transmits baseband signals.
NOTE
The maximum length of the FE/GE cable for remote connection is 100 m.
Exterior
The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable. It has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-9. Figure 7-9 FE/GE cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-9 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
257
7 BBU3900 Cables
Table 7-9 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable Pin on the RJ45 Connector X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Wire Color Orange White and orange Green White and green Blue White and blue Brown White and brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Pin on the RJ45 Connector X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7
7.9 FE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

The FE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main control board to the UFLP.
Exterior
The FE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-10. Figure 7-10 FE surge protection transfer cable
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-10 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
258
7 BBU3900 Cables
Table 7-10 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE surge protection transfer cable Pin on the RJ45 Connector X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Wire Color Orange White Green White Blue White Brown White Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Pin on the RJ45 Connector X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7
7.10 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports

The cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP transmission.
Structure
The cable between two FE electrical ports has an RJ45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-11. Figure 7-11 Cable between two FE electrical ports
(1) RJ45 connector
7.11 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports

The cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP transmission.
Structure
The cable between two FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-12.
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-12 Cable between two FE optical ports
(1) LC connector
7.12 FE/GE Optical Cable

The FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission device. This cable is optional.
Exterior
The FE/GE optical cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector, or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-13, Figure 7-14, and Figure 7-15 respectively. Figure 7-13 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-14 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)
Figure 7-15 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
260
7 BBU3900 Cables
CAUTION
When connecting the BBU3900 and the transmission device using the FE/GE optical cable, adhere to the following rules: l l The TX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the RX port on the transmission device. The RX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the TX port on the transmission device.
7.13 CPRI Fiber Optic Cable

CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber optic cables. They transmit CPRI signals.
NOTE
l When the distance between a BBU and an RRU or between two RRUs is longer than 100 m (328. 08 ft.), an ODF is used between the BBU and RRU or between two RRUs. l A single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU to an ODF or connects an ODF to an RRU.
Exterior
Figure 7-16 shows a fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs, with a DLC connector at each end. Figure 7-16 Fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU or between RRUs
(1) DLC connector
(2) Branch
(3) Label on the branch
When a multi-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the branches on the BBU side and RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18 in.) long, respectively. When a multimode fiber optic cable connects to two RRUs, the branches on both RRU sides are 0.03 m (1.18 in.) long. Figure 7-17 shows the connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
261
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-17 Connections for a CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
(1) CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU
Figure 7-18 shows a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU, with a DLC connector at one end and an FC connector at the other end. Figure 7-18 Single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU
(1) DLC connector (3) Label on the branch
(2) Branch (4) FC connector
When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an ODF, the branches on the BBU side and ODF side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.8 m (31.5 in.) long, respectively. When a single-mode fiber optic cable connects an ODF and an RRU, the branches on the RRU side and ODF side are 0.03 m (1.18 in.) and 0.8 m (31.5 in.) long, respectively. Figure 7-19 shows the connections for a single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
262
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-19 Connections for a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU
(1) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between a BBU (2) Single-mode CPRI fiber optic cable between an and an ODF ODF and an RRU
NOTE
CPRI fiber optic cables must be connected to the optical modules in the CPRI ports. Multi-mode fiber optic cables and single-mode fiber optic cables are connected to multi-mode optical modules and single-mode optical modules, respectively.
Pin Assignment
Table 7-11, Table 7-12, and Table 7-13 describe the labels on and recommended fiber optic cable connections. Table 7-11 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a fiber optic cable between a BBU and an RRU Label 1A 1B 2A 2B Installation Position CPRI RX port on the RRU CPRI TX port on the RRU TX port on the BBU RX port on the BBU
Table 7-12 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a fiber optic cable between RRUs Label 1A 1B
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Installation Position CPRI RX port on RRU 1 CPRI TX port on RRU 1

7 BBU3900 Cables
Label 2A 2B
Installation Position CPRI TX port on RRU 0 CPRI RX port on RRU 0
Table 7-13 Labels on and recommended connections for branches of a single-mode fiber optic cable between a BBU and an ODF or between an ODF and an RRU Label 1A 1B 2A 2B Installation Position RX port on the BBU or CPRI RX port on the RRU TX port on the BBU or CPRI TX port on the RRU ODF ODF
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU
This describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits the environment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU.
Structure
The monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU has an RJ-45 connector at one end and four bare wires at the other end. Figure 7-20 shows the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. Figure 7-20 Monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU
Pin Assignment
Table 7-14 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
264
7 BBU3900 Cables
Table 7-14 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X1.1 X1.2 X1.4 X1.5 Color X2 to X5 Ends Description Terminal on the APMI TX+ TXTwisted pair RX+ RX-
White Orange Blue White
X2 X3 X4 X5
Twisted pair
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoring information collected by the HEUA to the BBU.
Appearance
Figure 7-21 shows the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU. Figure 7-21 Monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-15 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU. Table 7-15 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3
Wire Color White Orange White
Twisted pair
265
7 BBU3900 Cables
X1 End X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8
X2 End X2.6 X2.5 X2.4 X2.7 X2.8
Wire Color Green White Blue White Brown
Wire Type
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.
Exterior
Figure 7-22 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU. Figure 7-22 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-16 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU. Table 7-16 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3
Wire Color White Orange White
Twisted pair
266
7 BBU3900 Cables
X1 End X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8
X2 End X2.6 X2.5 X2.4 X2.7 X2.8
Wire Color Green White Blue White Brown
Wire Type
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
7.17 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable

This section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals from the EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.
Exterior
Figure 7-23 shows the EMUA monitoring signal cable. Figure 7-23 EMUA monitoring signal cable
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-17 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable. Table 7-17 Pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X1.1 X1.2 X1.5 X1.4 Pin on the DB9 Male Connector X2.3 X2.7 X2.6 X2.2 Color Description Terminal on the APMI TX+ TXTwisted pair RXRX+
White Orange White Blue
Twisted pair
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
267
7 BBU3900 Cables
7.18 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power fault alarms on the PSU.
Structure
Figure 7-24 shows the Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Figure 7-24 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
Pin Assignment
Table 7-18 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Table 7-18 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) X1 End X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Wire Color Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair
7.19 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position status of the PSU.
Exterior
Figure 7-25 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-25 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
(1) RJ45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-19 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Table 7-19 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8 X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.5 X2.4 X2.7 X2.8 Wire Color White Orange White Green White Blue White Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair
7.20 BBU Alarm Cable

The BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.
Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 7-26. However, an RJ-45 connector at one end may be removed, and an appropriate terminal may be added according to the field requirements.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
269
7 BBU3900 Cables
Figure 7-26 BBU alarm cable
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 7-20 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable. Table 7-20 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable BBU Alarm Port Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r at One End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8 EXTALM0 X1.1 X1.2 Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r at the Other End X2.1 X2.2 Twisted pair X2.3 X2.6 Twisted pair X2.5 X2.4 Twisted pair X2.7 X2.8 Twisted pair X2.1 X2.2 Description
EXTALM1
White and orange Orange White and green Green White and blue Blue White and brown Brown White and orange Orange
Twisted pair
Boolean value input 4+ Boolean value input 4(GND) Boolean value input 5+ Boolean value input 5(GND) Boolean value input 6+ Boolean value input 6(GND) Boolean value input 7+ Boolean value input 7(GND) Boolean value input 0+ Boolean value input 0(GND)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
270
7 BBU3900 Cables
BBU Alarm Port
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r at One End X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8
Wire Color
Wire Type
Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r at the Other End X2.3 X2.6
Description
White and green Green White and blue Blue White and brown Brown
Twisted pair
Boolean value input 1+ Boolean value input 1(GND) Boolean value input 2+ Boolean value input 2(GND) Boolean value input 3+ Boolean value input 3(GND)
Twisted pair
X2.5 X2.4
Twisted pair
X2.7 X2.8
7.21 GPS Clock Signal Cable

The GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.
Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 7-27. Figure 7-27 GPS clock signal cable
(1) SMA male connector
(2) N-type female connector
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
271
8 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900
About This Chapter

This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA and SLPU. 8.1 EMUA The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet and reports related alarms. 8.2 OMB The Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMB cabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmission equipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internal modules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, and the grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture, mould, and salt fog damage. 8.3 IMB03 The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-in BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment. 8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack A 10 U indoor centralized rack is installed indoors to provide a 19-inch wide space for equipment. 8.5 DCDU-03 The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications. 8.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C The DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supply power to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications, and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios. 8.7 AC/DC Power Equipment The AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input power distribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convert
the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DC power to the components in the cabinet. 8.8 SLPU The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP, UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection. 8.9 WGRU The WGRU (WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit) receives and processes positioning information and synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then outputs the timing signals as a system clock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate PPS signals and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The WGRU is optional for the NodeB which is installed in the WGRU box. The NodeB can be configured with one WGRU which provides the positioning function.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
273
8.1 EMUA
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet and reports related alarms. The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring the environment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the following items: l l l Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor Power distribution
For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.
8.2 OMB
The Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMB cabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmission equipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internal modules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, and the grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture, mould, and salt fog damage.
Appearance
Figure 8-1 shows the OMB cabinet. Figure 8-1 Appearance of the OMB(Unit: mm)
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
274
Functions
The functions of the OMB cabinet are as follows: l l l l l l l l Providing 3 U installation space for the distributed BTS. Supporting the AC input modes of 220 V single-phase, 110 V dual-live two-phase. Supporting -48 V DC power input. Providing secure and reliable surge protection and inductive lightning protection through the AC surge protection box (optional). Connecting the grounding bus of the cabinet, PGND cable of the surge protector, and PGND cables of other devices to the grounding busbar of the cabinet. Dissipating heat by using the core of the heat exchanger and outer and inner air circulation fans and enabling excellent heat dissipation. Protecting itself against dust, adapting to different environments even though in adverse air conditions. Being capable of working with the distributed or separated base stations and meeting the requirements in different scenarios.
Structure
There are two types of OMBs, that is, the AC OMB and DC OMB. The AC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, AC/DC power equipment, and AC surge protection box, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
275
Figure 8-2 Hardware structure of the AC OMB
(1) HEUA
(2) BBU
(3) AC/DC power equipment
(4) AC surge protection box
The DC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 8-3.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
276
Figure 8-3 Hardware structure of the DC OMB
(1) HEUA
(2) BBU
(3) DCDU-03B
Specifications
Table 8-1 lists the specifications of the OMB. Table 8-1 Specifications of the OMB Item Dimensions Weight Specification 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (height x width x depth) OMB subrack: 15 kg AC OMB: 25 kg DC OMB: 22.5kg
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
277
Item Temperature
Specification Without solar radiation: -40C to +50C Short-term working at 50C to 55C
NOTE The short-term work indicates that the continuous work does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulated working time in a year does not exceed 15 days.
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
8.3 IMB03
The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-in BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment.
Exterior
Figure 8-4 shows an IMB03. Figure 8-4 IMB03
(1) Front cover plate of the IMB03 (3) Warning label to avoid treading
(2) Protection cover (4) Slots of internal modules in the IMB03
Functions
The IMB03 performs the following functions: l
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Provides a 3 U space for a distributed base station.

l l l l
Supports 220 V single-phase AC input and 110 V dual-live-wire AC input. Supports power input of -48 V DC. Supports various installation modes, including the wall-mounting mode, rack-mounting mode, and combined-with-IFS06 mode. Provides a well-developed function of heat dissipation and facilitates cabling of internal modules.
Structure
There are two types of IMB03, that is, the DC IMB03 and AC IMB03. A DC IMB03 houses the BBU and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 DC IMB03
(1) DCDU-03B
(2) BBU
An AC IMB03 houses a BBU and AC/DC power equipment, as shown in Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-6 AC IMB03
(1) AC/DC power equipment
(2) BBU
Specifications
Table 8-2 lists the specifications of the IMB03. Table 8-2 Specifications of the IMB03 Item Dimensions Weight Specification 560 mm (22.05 in.) x 425 mm (16.73 in.) x 180 mm (7.09 in.) (height x width x depth) 10 kg
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
280
8.4 10 U Indoor Centralized Rack

A 10 U indoor centralized rack is installed indoors to provide a 19-inch wide space for equipment.
Exterior
A 10 U indoor centralized rack is 19-inch wide and 10 U high, as shown in Figure 8-7. Figure 8-7 10 U indoor centralized rack
(1) Left frame
(2) Right frame
Functions
A 10 U indoor centralized rack provides the following functions: l l l Provides a 10 U space for a distributed base station. Supports power input of -48 V DC. Connects the main ground cable for the rack and ground cable for equipment to the ground terminal on the rack.
Specifications
Table 8-3 lists the specifications for the 10 U indoor centralized rack.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
281
Table 8-3 Specifications for the 10 U indoor centralized rack Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Specification 700 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.72 in.) 15 kg (33.08 lb)
8.5 DCDU-03
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models have the same exterior and engineering specifications.
Exterior
Figure 8-8 shows the DCDU-03. Figure 8-8 DCDU-03
Functions
The DCDU-03 provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different MCB configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and separated base stations. Table 8-4 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
282
Table 8-4 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03 DCDU Model DC Output Terminal Power Consumpti on Equipment RRU BBU and the transmission equipment of the customer Transmissio n equipment of the customer BBU Transmissio n equipment of the customer Fan box MCB Specificati on 20 A 12 A MCB Quantity Applicatio n Scenario
DCDU-03B
LOAD0 to LOAD5 LOAD6 to LOAD8
6 3
Distributed base station/ Mini base station
DCDU-03C
LOAD0 to LOAD5
12 A
LOAD6 LOAD7
12 A 6A
1 1
Separated macro base station in the -48 V DC power supply/ Transmissio n cabinet
LOAD8
6A
Ports
Figure 8-9 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
283
Figure 8-9 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03
Table 8-5 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03. Table 8-5 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03 Port DC input terminal Specification Supports the M6 2-hole OT terminal (one input) Power Cable CrossSectional Area l DCDU-03B: maximum = 25mm2, default = 25mm2, l DCDU-03C: maximum = 25mm2, default = 16mm2, Remarks When the DCDU-03C is used in the transmission cabinet, the cross-sectional area of the input power cable is 4 mm2.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
284
Port DC output terminal
Specification Supports the M4 single hole OT terminal (9 outputs)
Power Cable CrossSectional Area Maximum = 6mm2
Remarks l The specification for a power cable depends on the device to which the cable is connected. For example, the specification for a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2. l Three rows of wiring terminals for outputs: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND, where, the last three pairs of the PGND wiring terminals support the grounding of the M4 2hole OT terminals, which are marked in red in Figure 8-9
8.6 DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C

The DCDU-11B and DCDU-11C are 1 U-high direct current distribution units, which supply power to each component in the cabinet. They have the same exterior, engineering specifications, and ports but different circuit breaker specifications and usage scenarios.
Exterior
Figure 8-10 and Figure 8-11 show the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C respectively. Figure 8-10 Front view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
285
Figure 8-11 Rear view of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
NOTE
The DCDU-11C does not use the equipotential connection point and ground point. The DCDU-11B uses the equipotential connection point or ground point only in one of the following scenarios: l Scenario 1: The DCDU-11B is placed in an open rack and is connected to the ground bar of the open rack by using the equipotential connection point near the mounting ears. l Scenario 2: The DCDU-11B is mounted on a wall to serve as an independent power distribution device, which is connected to the ground bar in the equipment room by using the ground point at the rear of the DCDU-11B.
Function
The DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C provides ten 48 V DC outputs. Different circuit breaker configurations can meet power distribution requirements for a distributed or outdoor macro base station. Table 8-6 lists the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C. Table 8-6 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C DCDU Type DC Output Termina l LOAD0 to LOAD5 LOAD6 LOAD7 LOAD8 Equipment Circuit Breaker Specifica tions 25 A Circuit Breaker Description
DCDU-11 B
RRU0 to RRU5
SW0 to SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
Distributed or mini base station
BBU or transmission equipment BBU or transmission equipment EMUA or transmission equipment Fan box
25 A 25 A 25 A
LOAD9
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
25 A
SW9
286
DCDU Type
DC Output Termina l LOAD0 LOAD1 LOAD2 LOAD3 LOAD4 LOAD5 LOAD6 LOAD7 LOAD8
Equipment
Circuit Breaker Specifica tions 6A 6A 12 A 12 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A
Circuit Breaker
Description
DCDU-11 C
Transmission equipment Transmission equipment Transmission equipment Transmission equipment Transmission equipment Transmission equipment BBU or transmission equipment BBU or transmission equipment EMUA or transmission equipment Fan box
SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
48 V outdoor macro base station or transmission cabinet
LOAD9
25 A
SW9
Ports
Figure 8-12 shows the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
287
Figure 8-12 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C
Table 8-7 describes specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C. Table 8-7 Specifications of the ports on the panel of the DCDU-11B/DCDU-11C S N (1) Port DC input terminal Label NEG(-) RTN(+) Terminal and Cable M6 one-hole OT terminal (two wires) and a maximum cross-sectional area of 25 mm2. Description Negative power input wiring terminal Positive power input wiring terminal
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
288
S N (2)
Port DC output terminal
Label LOAD0 to LOAD9
Terminal and Cable DCDU-11B: l Figure 8-13 shows an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector adapting to LOAD0 to LOAD5 terminals. The maximum crosssectional area is 10 mm2. l Figure 8-14 shows an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector adapting to LOAD6 to LOAD9 terminals. The maximum crosssectional area is 4 mm2. DCDU-11C: Figure 8-14 shows an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector adapting to LOAD0 to LOAD9 terminals. The maximum crosssectional area is 4 mm2.
Description For details about DC output specifications, see Table 8-6.
(3)
Circuit breaker
SW0 to SW9
The circuit breakers SW0 to SW9 control the ports LOAD0 to LOAD9 respectively, controlling the power supplies to the BBU, fan box, DC heater, and transmission equipment.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
289
Figure 8-13 Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (1)
Figure 8-14 Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (2)
8.7 AC/DC Power Equipment

The AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input power distribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convert the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DC power to the components in the cabinet.
Appearance
Figure 8-15 shows the AC/DC power equipment. Figure 8-15 AC/DC power equipment
(1) AC power supply socket (3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment
(2) Wiring terminal for the RRU (4) Power distribution control switch for the RRU
(5) Power distribution control switch for the transmission (6) Rectifier equipment (7) Monitoring port (8) DC output port LOAD1
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
290

(9) DC output port LOAD2

(10) Output port for the batteries BATT
Interface
Table 8-8 describes the panel of the AC/DC power equipment. Table 8-8 Panel of the AC/DC power equipment Interface Type AC power supply socket Monitoring port Label INPUT RS232 RS485 COM DC output port LOAD1 LOAD2 Description AC power supply socket Reserved port Monitoring port for the rectifier Reserved port Output port for the BBU and HEUA(10A) Output port for the transmission equipment (20A) Output port for the batteries (20A) Wiring terminal for the RRU power cable(12A) Wiring terminal for the power cable for the transmission equipment(4A) Connector Type 3-pin male connector RJ-45 connector H4 connector H4 connector
BAT DC output wiring terminal RRU TM
H4 connector OT terminal OT terminal
LED
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the panel of the rectifier in the AC/DC power equipment. Table 8-9 LEDs on the panel of the rectifier Label RUN Color Green Name Run LED Status ON OFF Description The rectifier is running properly. An error occurs during the running of the rectifier.
291
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
Label ALARM
Color Yellow
Name Alarm LED
Status ON Blinking OFF
Description Output overcurrent alarm or overtemperature alarm The communication is disrupted. The rectifier is running properly. Fan faults, output overvoltage, and external short circuit. The rectifier is running properly.
FAULT
Red
Fault LED
ON OFF
Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power equipment. Table 8-10 LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module Label RUN Color Green Name Run LED Status Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red Alarm LED ON OFF Description The module is running properly.
The module is not faulty but unable to communicate with the PMU properly. An alarm is generated. No alarm is generated.
DIP Switches
Figure 8-16 shows the DIP switches on the PMU.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
292
Figure 8-16 DIP switches on the PMU
Table 8-11 describes the settings of the DIP switches on the PMU. Table 8-11 Settings of the DIP switches on the PMU No. 1~5 Function Defines the communication address of the PMU Operation (1) Switches 1 to 5 correspond to bits 0 to 4. ON: 1, OFF: 0 For example: to set the address of PMU to 3, set switches 3 to 5 as OFF. (2) Default setting before delivery: 1 (BIT0), ON 2 (BIT1), ON 3 (BIT2), OFF 4 (BIT3), OFF 5 (BIT4), OFF
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
293
No. 6
Function Selects baud rate for communicating with the BTS
Operation Set as ON, indicating that the baud rate is 9600. (If it is set as OFF, the baud rate is 19200.) Set as OFF
7 and 8
Reserved and not defined
Specifications
Table 8-12 lists the specifications of the AC/DC Power Equipment. Table 8-12 Specifications of the AC/DC Power Equipment Item Input voltage range Specification 176 V AC to 290 V AC for the 220 V AC single-phase input power 90 V AC to 175 V AC for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power Frequency of the input voltage Output voltage range Output current 45 Hz to 65 Hz 42 V DC to 58 V DC 15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power 7.5 A for the110 V AC dual-live-wire input power Surge protection capability 2 kA in differential mode 4 kA in common mode
8.8 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP, UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.
8.8.1 Exterior of SLPU

The SLPU has a case structure, which requires a 19-inch wide and 1 U high space. Figure 8-17 shows the SLPU. Figure 8-17 SLPU
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
294
8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPU

This section describes the configuration principles of the SPLU.
Slots of the SLPU

Figure 8-18 shows the slots of the SLPU. Figure 8-18 Slots of the SLPU
Configuration of the SLPU

When serving as a trunk signal protection unit, the SLPU is a mandatory component, and it is integrated with a UELP or UFLP and installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet. Table 8-13 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU. Table 8-13 Configuration principles of the SLPU (1) Board UELP Optional/ Mandatory Optional Maximum Quantity 4 Slot Slots 0 to 3 Configuration Restriction The priorities of the slots in configuration are as follows in descending order: slot 2, slot 0, slot 1, and slot 3. If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.
UFLP
Optional
Slot 3
When serving as a monitoring signal protection unit for not more than 16 dry contacts, the SLPU is an optional component, and it is integrated with two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the BBU. Table 8-14 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU.
Table 8-14 Configuration principles of the SLPU (2) Board USLP2 Optional/ Mandatory Optional Quantity 2 Slot Slots 2 and 3 Configuration Restriction -
8.8.3 UELP
Each Universal E1/T1 Lightning Protection Unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four paths of E1/T1 signals.
Panel
Figure 8-19 shows the panel of the UELP. Figure 8-19 UELP panel
Ports
Table 8-15 lists the ports of the UELP. Table 8-15 Ports of the UELP Label INSIDE OUTSIDE Connector DB25 connector DB26 connector Description Connected to the board for transmission in the base station Connected to the external transmission devices
DIP Switch
The UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded. The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 8-20 shows the DIP switch on the UELP.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
296
Figure 8-20 DIP switch on the UELP
Table 8-16 describes the DIP switch on the UELP. Table 8-16 DIP switch on the UELP DIP Switch S1 Bit Status 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF Not grounded Grounded Description
Other status
NOTE
The 75-ohm E1 cable can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the 120-ohm E1 cable and the 100ohm T1 cable cannot be grounded.
8.8.4 UFLP
The universal FE/GE lightning protection (UFLP) board is a universal FE surge protection unit, each UFLP supports 2-way FE surge protection.
Panel
Figure 8-21 shows the panel of the UFLP.
Figure 8-21 Panel of the UFLP
Ports
Table 8-17 describes the ports on the panel of the UFLP. Table 8-17 Ports on the panel of the UFLP Port Location INSIDE side Label FE0, FE1 Connector Type RJ-45 Description Connected to the board for transmission in the base station Connected to the external transmission devices
OUTSIDE side
FE0, FE1
RJ-45
8.8.5 USLP2
The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.
Panel
Figure 8-22 shows the panel of the USLP2. Figure 8-22 Panel of the USLP2
Port
There are four input ports and two output ports on the USLP2. Table 8-18 lists the ports on the panel of the USLP2.
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
298
Table 8-18 Ports on the panel of the USLP2 Label IN0, IN1, IN2, and IN3 OUT0, OUT1 Port Type 4-pin Quantity 4 Description Input ports used to connect the customized alarm devices. Output ports used to connect the EXT-ALM port of the UEIU or UPEU in the cabinet.
RJ45
Figure 8-23 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2. Figure 8-23 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
OUT0
7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2
OUT1
7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2 1
IN0
2 3 4 1
IN1
2 3 4 1
IN2
2 3 4 1
IN3
2 3 4
Table 8-19 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2. Table 8-19 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2 Input Label IN0 Pin IN0.1 IN0.2 IN0.3 IN0.4 IN1 IN1.1 IN1.2 IN1.3 IN1.4
Issue 08 (2011-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Output Label OUT1 Pin OUT1.1 OUT1.2 OUT1.4 OUT1.5 OUT1.3 OUT1.6 OUT1.7 OUT1.8
299
Input Label IN2 Pin IN2.1 IN2.2 IN2.3 IN2.4 IN3 IN3.1 IN3.2 IN3.3 IN3.4
Output Label OUT0 Pin OUT0.1 OUT0.2 OUT0.4 OUT0.5 OUT0.3 OUT0.6 OUT0.7 OUT0.8
For details about the application of the USLP2, see 8.8.2 Configuration of the SLPU.
8.9 WGRU
The WGRU (WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit) receives and processes positioning information and synchronization timing signals from the GPS, and then outputs the timing signals as a system clock source. These timing signals and positioning information can be used to generate PPS signals and Network Assisted GPS (AGPS) positioning information. The WGRU is optional for the NodeB which is installed in the WGRU box. The NodeB can be configured with one WGRU which provides the positioning function.
Appearance
Figure 8-24 shows the exterior of WGRU, Figure 8-25 shows the WGRU installed in the WGRU box. Figure 8-24 Exterior of the WGRU
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
300
Figure 8-25 WGRU installed in the WGRU box
Panel
The components on the front panel of the WGRU suite are LEDs, RST button, and output ports. The Figure 8-26 shows the front panel of the WGRU. The components on the rear panel are the power input socket and the GPS signal input port. The Figure 8-27 shows the rear panel of the WGRU box. Figure 8-26 Front panel of the WGRU
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
301
Figure 8-27 Rear panel of the WGRU box
Indicators on the Front Panel of the WGRU

This describes indicators on the front panel of the WGRU. There are three indicators, that is the RUN, ALM, and ACT indicators on the front panel of the WGRU. Table 8-20 describes the indicators. Table 8-20 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU Indicator RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On Meaning The WGRU suite works properly. The power supply is normal but the WGRU suite is faulty. The power supply is abnormal or the WGRU suite is faulty. There is no alarm. There is a fault alarm. The WGRU suite obtains correct positioning information. The WGRU suite cannot obtain correct positioning information.
Off
ALM
Red
Off On
ACT
Green
On
Off
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
302
Ports on the Front Panel of the WGRU

The following describes the ports on the front panel of the WGRU. The ports consist of PPS1, PPS2, COM1, COM2, CLK1, and CLK2. Table 8-21 lists the ports. Table 8-21 Ports on the front panel of the WGRU Name PPS1 PPS2 COM1 Type RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Description It outputs PPS signals Obligate It is used to transmit GPS information and exchange management and maintenance information with BBU. Obligate Obligate Obligate
COM2 CLK1 CLK2
RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45
Ports on the Rear Panel

The rear panel of the WGRU consists of the POWER port and ANT port. Table 8-22 describes the ports on the rear panel of the WGRU. Table 8-22 Ports on the rear panel of the WGRU Port Label POWER ANT Connector Two-pole male connector N-type female connector Description Used to feed external power Used for the connection to the GPS antenna system
Issue 08 (2011-09-30)
303

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

BBU3900

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.